APE Price: $0.43 (+4.72%)
    /

    Contract Diff Checker

    Contract Name:
    DropERC721

    Contract Source Code:

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
    // ERC721A Contracts v3.3.0
    // Creator: Chiru Labs
    
    ////////// CHANGELOG: turn `approve` to virtual //////////
    
    pragma solidity ^0.8.4;
    
    import "erc721a-upgradeable/contracts/IERC721AUpgradeable.sol";
    import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/token/ERC721/IERC721ReceiverUpgradeable.sol";
    import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/utils/AddressUpgradeable.sol";
    import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/utils/ContextUpgradeable.sol";
    import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/utils/StringsUpgradeable.sol";
    import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/utils/introspection/ERC165Upgradeable.sol";
    import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/proxy/utils/Initializable.sol";
    
    /**
     * @dev Implementation of https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-721[ERC721] Non-Fungible Token Standard, including
     * the Metadata extension. Built to optimize for lower gas during batch mints.
     *
     * Assumes serials are sequentially minted starting at _startTokenId() (defaults to 0, e.g. 0, 1, 2, 3..).
     *
     * Assumes that an owner cannot have more than 2**64 - 1 (max value of uint64) of supply.
     *
     * Assumes that the maximum token id cannot exceed 2**256 - 1 (max value of uint256).
     */
    contract ERC721AUpgradeable is Initializable, ContextUpgradeable, ERC165Upgradeable, IERC721AUpgradeable {
        using AddressUpgradeable for address;
        using StringsUpgradeable for uint256;
    
        // The tokenId of the next token to be minted.
        uint256 internal _currentIndex;
    
        // The number of tokens burned.
        uint256 internal _burnCounter;
    
        // Token name
        string private _name;
    
        // Token symbol
        string private _symbol;
    
        // Mapping from token ID to ownership details
        // An empty struct value does not necessarily mean the token is unowned. See _ownershipOf implementation for details.
        mapping(uint256 => TokenOwnership) internal _ownerships;
    
        // Mapping owner address to address data
        mapping(address => AddressData) private _addressData;
    
        // Mapping from token ID to approved address
        mapping(uint256 => address) private _tokenApprovals;
    
        // Mapping from owner to operator approvals
        mapping(address => mapping(address => bool)) private _operatorApprovals;
    
        function __ERC721A_init(string memory name_, string memory symbol_) internal onlyInitializing {
            __ERC721A_init_unchained(name_, symbol_);
        }
    
        function __ERC721A_init_unchained(string memory name_, string memory symbol_) internal onlyInitializing {
            _name = name_;
            _symbol = symbol_;
            _currentIndex = _startTokenId();
        }
    
        /**
         * To change the starting tokenId, please override this function.
         */
        function _startTokenId() internal view virtual returns (uint256) {
            return 0;
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Burned tokens are calculated here, use _totalMinted() if you want to count just minted tokens.
         */
        function totalSupply() public view override returns (uint256) {
            // Counter underflow is impossible as _burnCounter cannot be incremented
            // more than _currentIndex - _startTokenId() times
            unchecked {
                return _currentIndex - _burnCounter - _startTokenId();
            }
        }
    
        /**
         * Returns the total amount of tokens minted in the contract.
         */
        function _totalMinted() internal view returns (uint256) {
            // Counter underflow is impossible as _currentIndex does not decrement,
            // and it is initialized to _startTokenId()
            unchecked {
                return _currentIndex - _startTokenId();
            }
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev See {IERC165-supportsInterface}.
         */
        function supportsInterface(
            bytes4 interfaceId
        ) public view virtual override(ERC165Upgradeable, IERC165Upgradeable) returns (bool) {
            return
                interfaceId == type(IERC721Upgradeable).interfaceId ||
                interfaceId == type(IERC721MetadataUpgradeable).interfaceId ||
                super.supportsInterface(interfaceId);
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev See {IERC721-balanceOf}.
         */
        function balanceOf(address owner) public view override returns (uint256) {
            if (owner == address(0)) revert BalanceQueryForZeroAddress();
            return uint256(_addressData[owner].balance);
        }
    
        /**
         * Returns the number of tokens minted by `owner`.
         */
        function _numberMinted(address owner) internal view returns (uint256) {
            return uint256(_addressData[owner].numberMinted);
        }
    
        /**
         * Returns the number of tokens burned by or on behalf of `owner`.
         */
        function _numberBurned(address owner) internal view returns (uint256) {
            return uint256(_addressData[owner].numberBurned);
        }
    
        /**
         * Returns the auxillary data for `owner`. (e.g. number of whitelist mint slots used).
         */
        function _getAux(address owner) internal view returns (uint64) {
            return _addressData[owner].aux;
        }
    
        /**
         * Sets the auxillary data for `owner`. (e.g. number of whitelist mint slots used).
         * If there are multiple variables, please pack them into a uint64.
         */
        function _setAux(address owner, uint64 aux) internal {
            _addressData[owner].aux = aux;
        }
    
        /**
         * Gas spent here starts off proportional to the maximum mint batch size.
         * It gradually moves to O(1) as tokens get transferred around in the collection over time.
         */
        function _ownershipOf(uint256 tokenId) internal view returns (TokenOwnership memory) {
            uint256 curr = tokenId;
    
            unchecked {
                if (_startTokenId() <= curr)
                    if (curr < _currentIndex) {
                        TokenOwnership memory ownership = _ownerships[curr];
                        if (!ownership.burned) {
                            if (ownership.addr != address(0)) {
                                return ownership;
                            }
                            // Invariant:
                            // There will always be an ownership that has an address and is not burned
                            // before an ownership that does not have an address and is not burned.
                            // Hence, curr will not underflow.
                            while (true) {
                                curr--;
                                ownership = _ownerships[curr];
                                if (ownership.addr != address(0)) {
                                    return ownership;
                                }
                            }
                        }
                    }
            }
            revert OwnerQueryForNonexistentToken();
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev See {IERC721-ownerOf}.
         */
        function ownerOf(uint256 tokenId) public view override returns (address) {
            return _ownershipOf(tokenId).addr;
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev See {IERC721Metadata-name}.
         */
        function name() public view virtual override returns (string memory) {
            return _name;
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev See {IERC721Metadata-symbol}.
         */
        function symbol() public view virtual override returns (string memory) {
            return _symbol;
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev See {IERC721Metadata-tokenURI}.
         */
        function tokenURI(uint256 tokenId) public view virtual override returns (string memory) {
            if (!_exists(tokenId)) revert URIQueryForNonexistentToken();
    
            string memory baseURI = _baseURI();
            return bytes(baseURI).length != 0 ? string(abi.encodePacked(baseURI, tokenId.toString())) : "";
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Base URI for computing {tokenURI}. If set, the resulting URI for each
         * token will be the concatenation of the `baseURI` and the `tokenId`. Empty
         * by default, can be overriden in child contracts.
         */
        function _baseURI() internal view virtual returns (string memory) {
            return "";
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev See {IERC721-approve}.
         */
        function approve(address to, uint256 tokenId) public virtual override {
            address owner = ERC721AUpgradeable.ownerOf(tokenId);
            if (to == owner) revert ApprovalToCurrentOwner();
    
            if (_msgSender() != owner)
                if (!isApprovedForAll(owner, _msgSender())) {
                    revert ApprovalCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();
                }
    
            _approve(to, tokenId, owner);
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev See {IERC721-getApproved}.
         */
        function getApproved(uint256 tokenId) public view override returns (address) {
            if (!_exists(tokenId)) revert ApprovalQueryForNonexistentToken();
    
            return _tokenApprovals[tokenId];
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev See {IERC721-setApprovalForAll}.
         */
        function setApprovalForAll(address operator, bool approved) public virtual override {
            if (operator == _msgSender()) revert ApproveToCaller();
    
            _operatorApprovals[_msgSender()][operator] = approved;
            emit ApprovalForAll(_msgSender(), operator, approved);
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev See {IERC721-isApprovedForAll}.
         */
        function isApprovedForAll(address owner, address operator) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
            return _operatorApprovals[owner][operator];
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev See {IERC721-transferFrom}.
         */
        function transferFrom(address from, address to, uint256 tokenId) public virtual override {
            _transfer(from, to, tokenId);
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev See {IERC721-safeTransferFrom}.
         */
        function safeTransferFrom(address from, address to, uint256 tokenId) public virtual override {
            safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId, "");
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev See {IERC721-safeTransferFrom}.
         */
        function safeTransferFrom(address from, address to, uint256 tokenId, bytes memory _data) public virtual override {
            _transfer(from, to, tokenId);
            if (to.isContract())
                if (!_checkContractOnERC721Received(from, to, tokenId, _data)) {
                    revert TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer();
                }
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Returns whether `tokenId` exists.
         *
         * Tokens can be managed by their owner or approved accounts via {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
         *
         * Tokens start existing when they are minted (`_mint`),
         */
        function _exists(uint256 tokenId) internal view returns (bool) {
            return _startTokenId() <= tokenId && tokenId < _currentIndex && !_ownerships[tokenId].burned;
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Equivalent to `_safeMint(to, quantity, '')`.
         */
        function _safeMint(address to, uint256 quantity) internal {
            _safeMint(to, quantity, "");
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Safely mints `quantity` tokens and transfers them to `to`.
         *
         * Requirements:
         *
         * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement
         *   {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received}, which is called for each safe transfer.
         * - `quantity` must be greater than 0.
         *
         * Emits a {Transfer} event.
         */
        function _safeMint(address to, uint256 quantity, bytes memory _data) internal {
            uint256 startTokenId = _currentIndex;
            if (to == address(0)) revert MintToZeroAddress();
            if (quantity == 0) revert MintZeroQuantity();
    
            _beforeTokenTransfers(address(0), to, startTokenId, quantity);
    
            // Overflows are incredibly unrealistic.
            // balance or numberMinted overflow if current value of either + quantity > 1.8e19 (2**64) - 1
            // updatedIndex overflows if _currentIndex + quantity > 1.2e77 (2**256) - 1
            unchecked {
                _addressData[to].balance += uint64(quantity);
                _addressData[to].numberMinted += uint64(quantity);
    
                _ownerships[startTokenId].addr = to;
                _ownerships[startTokenId].startTimestamp = uint64(block.timestamp);
    
                uint256 updatedIndex = startTokenId;
                uint256 end = updatedIndex + quantity;
    
                if (to.isContract()) {
                    do {
                        emit Transfer(address(0), to, updatedIndex);
                        if (!_checkContractOnERC721Received(address(0), to, updatedIndex++, _data)) {
                            revert TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer();
                        }
                    } while (updatedIndex < end);
                    // Reentrancy protection
                    if (_currentIndex != startTokenId) revert();
                } else {
                    do {
                        emit Transfer(address(0), to, updatedIndex++);
                    } while (updatedIndex < end);
                }
                _currentIndex = updatedIndex;
            }
            _afterTokenTransfers(address(0), to, startTokenId, quantity);
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Mints `quantity` tokens and transfers them to `to`.
         *
         * Requirements:
         *
         * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
         * - `quantity` must be greater than 0.
         *
         * Emits a {Transfer} event.
         */
        function _mint(address to, uint256 quantity) internal {
            uint256 startTokenId = _currentIndex;
            if (to == address(0)) revert MintToZeroAddress();
            if (quantity == 0) revert MintZeroQuantity();
    
            _beforeTokenTransfers(address(0), to, startTokenId, quantity);
    
            // Overflows are incredibly unrealistic.
            // balance or numberMinted overflow if current value of either + quantity > 1.8e19 (2**64) - 1
            // updatedIndex overflows if _currentIndex + quantity > 1.2e77 (2**256) - 1
            unchecked {
                _addressData[to].balance += uint64(quantity);
                _addressData[to].numberMinted += uint64(quantity);
    
                _ownerships[startTokenId].addr = to;
                _ownerships[startTokenId].startTimestamp = uint64(block.timestamp);
    
                uint256 updatedIndex = startTokenId;
                uint256 end = updatedIndex + quantity;
    
                do {
                    emit Transfer(address(0), to, updatedIndex++);
                } while (updatedIndex < end);
    
                _currentIndex = updatedIndex;
            }
            _afterTokenTransfers(address(0), to, startTokenId, quantity);
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Transfers `tokenId` from `from` to `to`.
         *
         * Requirements:
         *
         * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
         * - `tokenId` token must be owned by `from`.
         *
         * Emits a {Transfer} event.
         */
        function _transfer(address from, address to, uint256 tokenId) private {
            TokenOwnership memory prevOwnership = _ownershipOf(tokenId);
    
            if (prevOwnership.addr != from) revert TransferFromIncorrectOwner();
    
            bool isApprovedOrOwner = (_msgSender() == from ||
                isApprovedForAll(from, _msgSender()) ||
                getApproved(tokenId) == _msgSender());
    
            if (!isApprovedOrOwner) revert TransferCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();
            if (to == address(0)) revert TransferToZeroAddress();
    
            _beforeTokenTransfers(from, to, tokenId, 1);
    
            // Clear approvals from the previous owner
            _approve(address(0), tokenId, from);
    
            // Underflow of the sender's balance is impossible because we check for
            // ownership above and the recipient's balance can't realistically overflow.
            // Counter overflow is incredibly unrealistic as tokenId would have to be 2**256.
            unchecked {
                _addressData[from].balance -= 1;
                _addressData[to].balance += 1;
    
                TokenOwnership storage currSlot = _ownerships[tokenId];
                currSlot.addr = to;
                currSlot.startTimestamp = uint64(block.timestamp);
    
                // If the ownership slot of tokenId+1 is not explicitly set, that means the transfer initiator owns it.
                // Set the slot of tokenId+1 explicitly in storage to maintain correctness for ownerOf(tokenId+1) calls.
                uint256 nextTokenId = tokenId + 1;
                TokenOwnership storage nextSlot = _ownerships[nextTokenId];
                if (nextSlot.addr == address(0)) {
                    // This will suffice for checking _exists(nextTokenId),
                    // as a burned slot cannot contain the zero address.
                    if (nextTokenId != _currentIndex) {
                        nextSlot.addr = from;
                        nextSlot.startTimestamp = prevOwnership.startTimestamp;
                    }
                }
            }
    
            emit Transfer(from, to, tokenId);
            _afterTokenTransfers(from, to, tokenId, 1);
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Equivalent to `_burn(tokenId, false)`.
         */
        function _burn(uint256 tokenId) internal virtual {
            _burn(tokenId, false);
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Destroys `tokenId`.
         * The approval is cleared when the token is burned.
         *
         * Requirements:
         *
         * - `tokenId` must exist.
         *
         * Emits a {Transfer} event.
         */
        function _burn(uint256 tokenId, bool approvalCheck) internal virtual {
            TokenOwnership memory prevOwnership = _ownershipOf(tokenId);
    
            address from = prevOwnership.addr;
    
            if (approvalCheck) {
                bool isApprovedOrOwner = (_msgSender() == from ||
                    isApprovedForAll(from, _msgSender()) ||
                    getApproved(tokenId) == _msgSender());
    
                if (!isApprovedOrOwner) revert TransferCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();
            }
    
            _beforeTokenTransfers(from, address(0), tokenId, 1);
    
            // Clear approvals from the previous owner
            _approve(address(0), tokenId, from);
    
            // Underflow of the sender's balance is impossible because we check for
            // ownership above and the recipient's balance can't realistically overflow.
            // Counter overflow is incredibly unrealistic as tokenId would have to be 2**256.
            unchecked {
                AddressData storage addressData = _addressData[from];
                addressData.balance -= 1;
                addressData.numberBurned += 1;
    
                // Keep track of who burned the token, and the timestamp of burning.
                TokenOwnership storage currSlot = _ownerships[tokenId];
                currSlot.addr = from;
                currSlot.startTimestamp = uint64(block.timestamp);
                currSlot.burned = true;
    
                // If the ownership slot of tokenId+1 is not explicitly set, that means the burn initiator owns it.
                // Set the slot of tokenId+1 explicitly in storage to maintain correctness for ownerOf(tokenId+1) calls.
                uint256 nextTokenId = tokenId + 1;
                TokenOwnership storage nextSlot = _ownerships[nextTokenId];
                if (nextSlot.addr == address(0)) {
                    // This will suffice for checking _exists(nextTokenId),
                    // as a burned slot cannot contain the zero address.
                    if (nextTokenId != _currentIndex) {
                        nextSlot.addr = from;
                        nextSlot.startTimestamp = prevOwnership.startTimestamp;
                    }
                }
            }
    
            emit Transfer(from, address(0), tokenId);
            _afterTokenTransfers(from, address(0), tokenId, 1);
    
            // Overflow not possible, as _burnCounter cannot be exceed _currentIndex times.
            unchecked {
                _burnCounter++;
            }
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Approve `to` to operate on `tokenId`
         *
         * Emits a {Approval} event.
         */
        function _approve(address to, uint256 tokenId, address owner) private {
            _tokenApprovals[tokenId] = to;
            emit Approval(owner, to, tokenId);
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Internal function to invoke {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received} on a target contract.
         *
         * @param from address representing the previous owner of the given token ID
         * @param to target address that will receive the tokens
         * @param tokenId uint256 ID of the token to be transferred
         * @param _data bytes optional data to send along with the call
         * @return bool whether the call correctly returned the expected magic value
         */
        function _checkContractOnERC721Received(
            address from,
            address to,
            uint256 tokenId,
            bytes memory _data
        ) private returns (bool) {
            try IERC721ReceiverUpgradeable(to).onERC721Received(_msgSender(), from, tokenId, _data) returns (
                bytes4 retval
            ) {
                return retval == IERC721ReceiverUpgradeable(to).onERC721Received.selector;
            } catch (bytes memory reason) {
                if (reason.length == 0) {
                    revert TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer();
                } else {
                    assembly {
                        revert(add(32, reason), mload(reason))
                    }
                }
            }
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Hook that is called before a set of serially-ordered token ids are about to be transferred. This includes minting.
         * And also called before burning one token.
         *
         * startTokenId - the first token id to be transferred
         * quantity - the amount to be transferred
         *
         * Calling conditions:
         *
         * - When `from` and `to` are both non-zero, `from`'s `tokenId` will be
         * transferred to `to`.
         * - When `from` is zero, `tokenId` will be minted for `to`.
         * - When `to` is zero, `tokenId` will be burned by `from`.
         * - `from` and `to` are never both zero.
         */
        function _beforeTokenTransfers(address from, address to, uint256 startTokenId, uint256 quantity) internal virtual {}
    
        /**
         * @dev Hook that is called after a set of serially-ordered token ids have been transferred. This includes
         * minting.
         * And also called after one token has been burned.
         *
         * startTokenId - the first token id to be transferred
         * quantity - the amount to be transferred
         *
         * Calling conditions:
         *
         * - When `from` and `to` are both non-zero, `from`'s `tokenId` has been
         * transferred to `to`.
         * - When `from` is zero, `tokenId` has been minted for `to`.
         * - When `to` is zero, `tokenId` has been burned by `from`.
         * - `from` and `to` are never both zero.
         */
        function _afterTokenTransfers(address from, address to, uint256 startTokenId, uint256 quantity) internal virtual {}
    
        /**
         * @dev This empty reserved space is put in place to allow future versions to add new
         * variables without shifting down storage in the inheritance chain.
         * See https://docs.openzeppelin.com/contracts/4.x/upgradeable#storage_gaps
         */
        uint256[42] private __gap;
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
    // OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (utils/introspection/IERC165.sol)
    
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /**
     * @dev Interface of the ERC165 standard, as defined in the
     * [EIP](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165).
     *
     * Implementers can declare support of contract interfaces, which can then be
     * queried by others ({ERC165Checker}).
     *
     * For an implementation, see {ERC165}.
     */
    interface IERC165 {
        /**
         * @dev Returns true if this contract implements the interface defined by
         * `interfaceId`. See the corresponding
         * [EIP section](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165#how-interfaces-are-identified)
         * to learn more about how these ids are created.
         *
         * This function call must use less than 30 000 gas.
         */
        function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) external view returns (bool);
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /**
     * @title ERC20 interface
     * @dev see https://github.com/ethereum/EIPs/issues/20
     */
    interface IERC20 {
        function totalSupply() external view returns (uint256);
    
        function balanceOf(address who) external view returns (uint256);
    
        function allowance(address owner, address spender) external view returns (uint256);
    
        function transfer(address to, uint256 value) external returns (bool);
    
        function approve(address spender, uint256 value) external returns (bool);
    
        function transferFrom(address from, address to, uint256 value) external returns (bool);
    
        event Transfer(address indexed from, address indexed to, uint256 value);
    
        event Approval(address indexed owner, address indexed spender, uint256 value);
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache 2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    import "./IERC165.sol";
    
    /**
     * @dev Interface for the NFT Royalty Standard.
     *
     * A standardized way to retrieve royalty payment information for non-fungible tokens (NFTs) to enable universal
     * support for royalty payments across all NFT marketplaces and ecosystem participants.
     *
     * _Available since v4.5._
     */
    interface IERC2981 is IERC165 {
        /**
         * @dev Returns how much royalty is owed and to whom, based on a sale price that may be denominated in any unit of
         * exchange. The royalty amount is denominated and should be payed in that same unit of exchange.
         */
        function royaltyInfo(
            uint256 tokenId,
            uint256 salePrice
        ) external view returns (address receiver, uint256 royaltyAmount);
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /// @author thirdweb
    
    /**
     *  @title   Batch-mint Metadata
     *  @notice  The `BatchMintMetadata` is a contract extension for any base NFT contract. It lets the smart contract
     *           using this extension set metadata for `n` number of NFTs all at once. This is enabled by storing a single
     *           base URI for a batch of `n` NFTs, where the metadata for each NFT in a relevant batch is `baseURI/tokenId`.
     */
    
    contract BatchMintMetadata {
        /// @dev Invalid index for batch
        error BatchMintInvalidBatchId(uint256 index);
    
        /// @dev Invalid token
        error BatchMintInvalidTokenId(uint256 tokenId);
    
        /// @dev Metadata frozen
        error BatchMintMetadataFrozen(uint256 batchId);
    
        /// @dev Largest tokenId of each batch of tokens with the same baseURI + 1 {ex: batchId 100 at position 0 includes tokens 0-99}
        uint256[] private batchIds;
    
        /// @dev Mapping from id of a batch of tokens => to base URI for the respective batch of tokens.
        mapping(uint256 => string) private baseURI;
    
        /// @dev Mapping from id of a batch of tokens => to whether the base URI for the respective batch of tokens is frozen.
        mapping(uint256 => bool) public batchFrozen;
    
        /// @dev This event emits when the metadata of all tokens are frozen.
        /// While not currently supported by marketplaces, this event allows
        /// future indexing if desired.
        event MetadataFrozen();
    
        // @dev This event emits when the metadata of a range of tokens is updated.
        /// So that the third-party platforms such as NFT market could
        /// timely update the images and related attributes of the NFTs.
        event BatchMetadataUpdate(uint256 _fromTokenId, uint256 _toTokenId);
    
        /**
         *  @notice         Returns the count of batches of NFTs.
         *  @dev            Each batch of tokens has an in ID and an associated `baseURI`.
         *                  See {batchIds}.
         */
        function getBaseURICount() public view returns (uint256) {
            return batchIds.length;
        }
    
        /**
         *  @notice         Returns the ID for the batch of tokens at the given index.
         *  @dev            See {getBaseURICount}.
         *  @param _index   Index of the desired batch in batchIds array.
         */
        function getBatchIdAtIndex(uint256 _index) public view returns (uint256) {
            if (_index >= getBaseURICount()) {
                revert BatchMintInvalidBatchId(_index);
            }
            return batchIds[_index];
        }
    
        /// @dev Returns the id for the batch of tokens the given tokenId belongs to.
        function _getBatchId(uint256 _tokenId) internal view returns (uint256 batchId, uint256 index) {
            uint256 numOfTokenBatches = getBaseURICount();
            uint256[] memory indices = batchIds;
    
            for (uint256 i = 0; i < numOfTokenBatches; i += 1) {
                if (_tokenId < indices[i]) {
                    index = i;
                    batchId = indices[i];
    
                    return (batchId, index);
                }
            }
    
            revert BatchMintInvalidTokenId(_tokenId);
        }
    
        /// @dev Returns the baseURI for a token. The intended metadata URI for the token is baseURI + tokenId.
        function _getBaseURI(uint256 _tokenId) internal view returns (string memory) {
            uint256 numOfTokenBatches = getBaseURICount();
            uint256[] memory indices = batchIds;
    
            for (uint256 i = 0; i < numOfTokenBatches; i += 1) {
                if (_tokenId < indices[i]) {
                    return baseURI[indices[i]];
                }
            }
    
            revert BatchMintInvalidTokenId(_tokenId);
        }
    
        /// @dev returns the starting tokenId of a given batchId.
        function _getBatchStartId(uint256 _batchID) internal view returns (uint256) {
            uint256 numOfTokenBatches = getBaseURICount();
            uint256[] memory indices = batchIds;
    
            for (uint256 i = 0; i < numOfTokenBatches; i++) {
                if (_batchID == indices[i]) {
                    if (i > 0) {
                        return indices[i - 1];
                    }
                    return 0;
                }
            }
    
            revert BatchMintInvalidBatchId(_batchID);
        }
    
        /// @dev Sets the base URI for the batch of tokens with the given batchId.
        function _setBaseURI(uint256 _batchId, string memory _baseURI) internal {
            if (batchFrozen[_batchId]) {
                revert BatchMintMetadataFrozen(_batchId);
            }
            baseURI[_batchId] = _baseURI;
            emit BatchMetadataUpdate(_getBatchStartId(_batchId), _batchId);
        }
    
        /// @dev Freezes the base URI for the batch of tokens with the given batchId.
        function _freezeBaseURI(uint256 _batchId) internal {
            string memory baseURIForBatch = baseURI[_batchId];
            if (bytes(baseURIForBatch).length == 0) {
                revert BatchMintInvalidBatchId(_batchId);
            }
            batchFrozen[_batchId] = true;
            emit MetadataFrozen();
        }
    
        /// @dev Mints a batch of tokenIds and associates a common baseURI to all those Ids.
        function _batchMintMetadata(
            uint256 _startId,
            uint256 _amountToMint,
            string memory _baseURIForTokens
        ) internal returns (uint256 nextTokenIdToMint, uint256 batchId) {
            batchId = _startId + _amountToMint;
            nextTokenIdToMint = batchId;
    
            batchIds.push(batchId);
    
            baseURI[batchId] = _baseURIForTokens;
        }
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /// @author thirdweb
    
    import "./interface/IContractMetadata.sol";
    
    /**
     *  @title   Contract Metadata
     *  @notice  Thirdweb's `ContractMetadata` is a contract extension for any base contracts. It lets you set a metadata URI
     *           for you contract.
     *           Additionally, `ContractMetadata` is necessary for NFT contracts that want royalties to get distributed on OpenSea.
     */
    
    abstract contract ContractMetadata is IContractMetadata {
        /// @dev The sender is not authorized to perform the action
        error ContractMetadataUnauthorized();
    
        /// @notice Returns the contract metadata URI.
        string public override contractURI;
    
        /**
         *  @notice         Lets a contract admin set the URI for contract-level metadata.
         *  @dev            Caller should be authorized to setup contractURI, e.g. contract admin.
         *                  See {_canSetContractURI}.
         *                  Emits {ContractURIUpdated Event}.
         *
         *  @param _uri     keccak256 hash of the role. e.g. keccak256("TRANSFER_ROLE")
         */
        function setContractURI(string memory _uri) external override {
            if (!_canSetContractURI()) {
                revert ContractMetadataUnauthorized();
            }
    
            _setupContractURI(_uri);
        }
    
        /// @dev Lets a contract admin set the URI for contract-level metadata.
        function _setupContractURI(string memory _uri) internal {
            string memory prevURI = contractURI;
            contractURI = _uri;
    
            emit ContractURIUpdated(prevURI, _uri);
        }
    
        /// @dev Returns whether contract metadata can be set in the given execution context.
        function _canSetContractURI() internal view virtual returns (bool);
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /// @author thirdweb
    
    import "./interface/IDelayedReveal.sol";
    
    /**
     *  @title   Delayed Reveal
     *  @notice  Thirdweb's `DelayedReveal` is a contract extension for base NFT contracts. It lets you create batches of
     *           'delayed-reveal' NFTs. You can learn more about the usage of delayed reveal NFTs here - https://blog.thirdweb.com/delayed-reveal-nfts
     */
    
    abstract contract DelayedReveal is IDelayedReveal {
        /// @dev The contract doesn't have any url to be delayed revealed
        error DelayedRevealNothingToReveal();
    
        /// @dev The result of the returned an incorrect hash
        error DelayedRevealIncorrectResultHash(bytes32 expected, bytes32 actual);
    
        /// @dev Mapping from tokenId of a batch of tokens => to delayed reveal data.
        mapping(uint256 => bytes) public encryptedData;
    
        /// @dev Sets the delayed reveal data for a batchId.
        function _setEncryptedData(uint256 _batchId, bytes memory _encryptedData) internal {
            encryptedData[_batchId] = _encryptedData;
        }
    
        /**
         *  @notice             Returns revealed URI for a batch of NFTs.
         *  @dev                Reveal encrypted base URI for `_batchId` with caller/admin's `_key` used for encryption.
         *                      Reverts if there's no encrypted URI for `_batchId`.
         *                      See {encryptDecrypt}.
         *
         *  @param _batchId     ID of the batch for which URI is being revealed.
         *  @param _key         Secure key used by caller/admin for encryption of baseURI.
         *
         *  @return revealedURI Decrypted base URI.
         */
        function getRevealURI(uint256 _batchId, bytes calldata _key) public view returns (string memory revealedURI) {
            bytes memory data = encryptedData[_batchId];
            if (data.length == 0) {
                revert DelayedRevealNothingToReveal();
            }
    
            (bytes memory encryptedURI, bytes32 provenanceHash) = abi.decode(data, (bytes, bytes32));
    
            revealedURI = string(encryptDecrypt(encryptedURI, _key));
    
            if (keccak256(abi.encodePacked(revealedURI, _key, block.chainid)) != provenanceHash) {
                revert DelayedRevealIncorrectResultHash(
                    provenanceHash,
                    keccak256(abi.encodePacked(revealedURI, _key, block.chainid))
                );
            }
        }
    
        /**
         *  @notice         Encrypt/decrypt data on chain.
         *  @dev            Encrypt/decrypt given `data` with `key`. Uses inline assembly.
         *                  See: https://ethereum.stackexchange.com/questions/69825/decrypt-message-on-chain
         *
         *  @param data     Bytes of data to encrypt/decrypt.
         *  @param key      Secure key used by caller for encryption/decryption.
         *
         *  @return result  Output after encryption/decryption of given data.
         */
        function encryptDecrypt(bytes memory data, bytes calldata key) public pure override returns (bytes memory result) {
            // Store data length on stack for later use
            uint256 length = data.length;
    
            // solhint-disable-next-line no-inline-assembly
            assembly {
                // Set result to free memory pointer
                result := mload(0x40)
                // Increase free memory pointer by lenght + 32
                mstore(0x40, add(add(result, length), 32))
                // Set result length
                mstore(result, length)
            }
    
            // Iterate over the data stepping by 32 bytes
            for (uint256 i = 0; i < length; i += 32) {
                // Generate hash of the key and offset
                bytes32 hash = keccak256(abi.encodePacked(key, i));
    
                bytes32 chunk;
                // solhint-disable-next-line no-inline-assembly
                assembly {
                    // Read 32-bytes data chunk
                    chunk := mload(add(data, add(i, 32)))
                }
                // XOR the chunk with hash
                chunk ^= hash;
                // solhint-disable-next-line no-inline-assembly
                assembly {
                    // Write 32-byte encrypted chunk
                    mstore(add(result, add(i, 32)), chunk)
                }
            }
        }
    
        /**
         *  @notice         Returns whether the relvant batch of NFTs is subject to a delayed reveal.
         *  @dev            Returns `true` if `_batchId`'s base URI is encrypted.
         *  @param _batchId ID of a batch of NFTs.
         */
        function isEncryptedBatch(uint256 _batchId) public view returns (bool) {
            return encryptedData[_batchId].length > 0;
        }
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /// @author thirdweb
    
    import "./interface/IDrop.sol";
    import "../lib/MerkleProof.sol";
    
    abstract contract Drop is IDrop {
        /// @dev The sender is not authorized to perform the action
        error DropUnauthorized();
    
        /// @dev Exceeded the max token total supply
        error DropExceedMaxSupply();
    
        /// @dev No active claim condition
        error DropNoActiveCondition();
    
        /// @dev Claim condition invalid currency or price
        error DropClaimInvalidTokenPrice(
            address expectedCurrency,
            uint256 expectedPricePerToken,
            address actualCurrency,
            uint256 actualExpectedPricePerToken
        );
    
        /// @dev Claim condition exceeded limit
        error DropClaimExceedLimit(uint256 expected, uint256 actual);
    
        /// @dev Claim condition exceeded max supply
        error DropClaimExceedMaxSupply(uint256 expected, uint256 actual);
    
        /// @dev Claim condition not started yet
        error DropClaimNotStarted(uint256 expected, uint256 actual);
    
        /*///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
                                State variables
        //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////*/
    
        /// @dev The active conditions for claiming tokens.
        ClaimConditionList public claimCondition;
    
        /*///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
                                Drop logic
        //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////*/
    
        /// @dev Lets an account claim tokens.
        function claim(
            address _receiver,
            uint256 _quantity,
            address _currency,
            uint256 _pricePerToken,
            AllowlistProof calldata _allowlistProof,
            bytes memory _data
        ) public payable virtual override {
            _beforeClaim(_receiver, _quantity, _currency, _pricePerToken, _allowlistProof, _data);
    
            uint256 activeConditionId = getActiveClaimConditionId();
    
            verifyClaim(activeConditionId, _dropMsgSender(), _quantity, _currency, _pricePerToken, _allowlistProof);
    
            // Update contract state.
            claimCondition.conditions[activeConditionId].supplyClaimed += _quantity;
            claimCondition.supplyClaimedByWallet[activeConditionId][_dropMsgSender()] += _quantity;
    
            // If there's a price, collect price.
            _collectPriceOnClaim(address(0), _quantity, _currency, _pricePerToken);
    
            // Mint the relevant tokens to claimer.
            uint256 startTokenId = _transferTokensOnClaim(_receiver, _quantity);
    
            emit TokensClaimed(activeConditionId, _dropMsgSender(), _receiver, startTokenId, _quantity);
    
            _afterClaim(_receiver, _quantity, _currency, _pricePerToken, _allowlistProof, _data);
        }
    
        /// @dev Lets a contract admin set claim conditions.
        function setClaimConditions(
            ClaimCondition[] calldata _conditions,
            bool _resetClaimEligibility
        ) external virtual override {
            if (!_canSetClaimConditions()) {
                revert DropUnauthorized();
            }
    
            uint256 existingStartIndex = claimCondition.currentStartId;
            uint256 existingPhaseCount = claimCondition.count;
    
            /**
             *  The mapping `supplyClaimedByWallet` uses a claim condition's UID as a key.
             *
             *  If `_resetClaimEligibility == true`, we assign completely new UIDs to the claim
             *  conditions in `_conditions`, effectively resetting the restrictions on claims expressed
             *  by `supplyClaimedByWallet`.
             */
            uint256 newStartIndex = existingStartIndex;
            if (_resetClaimEligibility) {
                newStartIndex = existingStartIndex + existingPhaseCount;
            }
    
            claimCondition.count = _conditions.length;
            claimCondition.currentStartId = newStartIndex;
    
            uint256 lastConditionStartTimestamp;
            for (uint256 i = 0; i < _conditions.length; i++) {
                require(i == 0 || lastConditionStartTimestamp < _conditions[i].startTimestamp, "ST");
    
                uint256 supplyClaimedAlready = claimCondition.conditions[newStartIndex + i].supplyClaimed;
                if (supplyClaimedAlready > _conditions[i].maxClaimableSupply) {
                    revert DropExceedMaxSupply();
                }
    
                claimCondition.conditions[newStartIndex + i] = _conditions[i];
                claimCondition.conditions[newStartIndex + i].supplyClaimed = supplyClaimedAlready;
    
                lastConditionStartTimestamp = _conditions[i].startTimestamp;
            }
    
            /**
             *  Gas refunds (as much as possible)
             *
             *  If `_resetClaimEligibility == true`, we assign completely new UIDs to the claim
             *  conditions in `_conditions`. So, we delete claim conditions with UID < `newStartIndex`.
             *
             *  If `_resetClaimEligibility == false`, and there are more existing claim conditions
             *  than in `_conditions`, we delete the existing claim conditions that don't get replaced
             *  by the conditions in `_conditions`.
             */
            if (_resetClaimEligibility) {
                for (uint256 i = existingStartIndex; i < newStartIndex; i++) {
                    delete claimCondition.conditions[i];
                }
            } else {
                if (existingPhaseCount > _conditions.length) {
                    for (uint256 i = _conditions.length; i < existingPhaseCount; i++) {
                        delete claimCondition.conditions[newStartIndex + i];
                    }
                }
            }
    
            emit ClaimConditionsUpdated(_conditions, _resetClaimEligibility);
        }
    
        /// @dev Checks a request to claim NFTs against the active claim condition's criteria.
        function verifyClaim(
            uint256 _conditionId,
            address _claimer,
            uint256 _quantity,
            address _currency,
            uint256 _pricePerToken,
            AllowlistProof calldata _allowlistProof
        ) public view virtual returns (bool isOverride) {
            ClaimCondition memory currentClaimPhase = claimCondition.conditions[_conditionId];
            uint256 claimLimit = currentClaimPhase.quantityLimitPerWallet;
            uint256 claimPrice = currentClaimPhase.pricePerToken;
            address claimCurrency = currentClaimPhase.currency;
    
            /*
             * Here `isOverride` implies that if the merkle proof verification fails,
             * the claimer would claim through open claim limit instead of allowlisted limit.
             */
            if (currentClaimPhase.merkleRoot != bytes32(0)) {
                (isOverride, ) = MerkleProof.verify(
                    _allowlistProof.proof,
                    currentClaimPhase.merkleRoot,
                    keccak256(
                        abi.encodePacked(
                            _claimer,
                            _allowlistProof.quantityLimitPerWallet,
                            _allowlistProof.pricePerToken,
                            _allowlistProof.currency
                        )
                    )
                );
            }
    
            if (isOverride) {
                claimLimit = _allowlistProof.quantityLimitPerWallet != 0
                    ? _allowlistProof.quantityLimitPerWallet
                    : claimLimit;
                claimPrice = _allowlistProof.pricePerToken != type(uint256).max
                    ? _allowlistProof.pricePerToken
                    : claimPrice;
                claimCurrency = _allowlistProof.pricePerToken != type(uint256).max && _allowlistProof.currency != address(0)
                    ? _allowlistProof.currency
                    : claimCurrency;
            }
    
            uint256 supplyClaimedByWallet = claimCondition.supplyClaimedByWallet[_conditionId][_claimer];
    
            if (_currency != claimCurrency || _pricePerToken != claimPrice) {
                revert DropClaimInvalidTokenPrice(_currency, _pricePerToken, claimCurrency, claimPrice);
            }
    
            if (_quantity == 0 || (_quantity + supplyClaimedByWallet > claimLimit)) {
                revert DropClaimExceedLimit(claimLimit, _quantity + supplyClaimedByWallet);
            }
    
            if (currentClaimPhase.supplyClaimed + _quantity > currentClaimPhase.maxClaimableSupply) {
                revert DropClaimExceedMaxSupply(
                    currentClaimPhase.maxClaimableSupply,
                    currentClaimPhase.supplyClaimed + _quantity
                );
            }
    
            if (currentClaimPhase.startTimestamp > block.timestamp) {
                revert DropClaimNotStarted(currentClaimPhase.startTimestamp, block.timestamp);
            }
        }
    
        /// @dev At any given moment, returns the uid for the active claim condition.
        function getActiveClaimConditionId() public view returns (uint256) {
            for (uint256 i = claimCondition.currentStartId + claimCondition.count; i > claimCondition.currentStartId; i--) {
                if (block.timestamp >= claimCondition.conditions[i - 1].startTimestamp) {
                    return i - 1;
                }
            }
    
            revert DropNoActiveCondition();
        }
    
        /// @dev Returns the claim condition at the given uid.
        function getClaimConditionById(uint256 _conditionId) external view returns (ClaimCondition memory condition) {
            condition = claimCondition.conditions[_conditionId];
        }
    
        /// @dev Returns the supply claimed by claimer for a given conditionId.
        function getSupplyClaimedByWallet(
            uint256 _conditionId,
            address _claimer
        ) public view returns (uint256 supplyClaimedByWallet) {
            supplyClaimedByWallet = claimCondition.supplyClaimedByWallet[_conditionId][_claimer];
        }
    
        /*////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
            Optional hooks that can be implemented in the derived contract
        ///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////*/
    
        /// @dev Exposes the ability to override the msg sender.
        function _dropMsgSender() internal virtual returns (address) {
            return msg.sender;
        }
    
        /// @dev Runs before every `claim` function call.
        function _beforeClaim(
            address _receiver,
            uint256 _quantity,
            address _currency,
            uint256 _pricePerToken,
            AllowlistProof calldata _allowlistProof,
            bytes memory _data
        ) internal virtual {}
    
        /// @dev Runs after every `claim` function call.
        function _afterClaim(
            address _receiver,
            uint256 _quantity,
            address _currency,
            uint256 _pricePerToken,
            AllowlistProof calldata _allowlistProof,
            bytes memory _data
        ) internal virtual {}
    
        /*///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
            Virtual functions: to be implemented in derived contract
        //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////*/
    
        /// @dev Collects and distributes the primary sale value of NFTs being claimed.
        function _collectPriceOnClaim(
            address _primarySaleRecipient,
            uint256 _quantityToClaim,
            address _currency,
            uint256 _pricePerToken
        ) internal virtual;
    
        /// @dev Transfers the NFTs being claimed.
        function _transferTokensOnClaim(
            address _to,
            uint256 _quantityBeingClaimed
        ) internal virtual returns (uint256 startTokenId);
    
        /// @dev Determine what wallet can update claim conditions
        function _canSetClaimConditions() internal view virtual returns (bool);
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /// @author thirdweb
    
    import "./interface/ILazyMint.sol";
    import "./BatchMintMetadata.sol";
    
    /**
     *  The `LazyMint` is a contract extension for any base NFT contract. It lets you 'lazy mint' any number of NFTs
     *  at once. Here, 'lazy mint' means defining the metadata for particular tokenIds of your NFT contract, without actually
     *  minting a non-zero balance of NFTs of those tokenIds.
     */
    
    abstract contract LazyMint is ILazyMint, BatchMintMetadata {
        /// @dev The sender is not authorized to perform the action
        error LazyMintUnauthorized();
        error LazyMintInvalidAmount();
    
        /// @notice The tokenId assigned to the next new NFT to be lazy minted.
        uint256 internal nextTokenIdToLazyMint;
    
        /**
         *  @notice                  Lets an authorized address lazy mint a given amount of NFTs.
         *
         *  @param _amount           The number of NFTs to lazy mint.
         *  @param _baseURIForTokens The base URI for the 'n' number of NFTs being lazy minted, where the metadata for each
         *                           of those NFTs is `${baseURIForTokens}/${tokenId}`.
         *  @param _data             Additional bytes data to be used at the discretion of the consumer of the contract.
         *  @return batchId          A unique integer identifier for the batch of NFTs lazy minted together.
         */
        function lazyMint(
            uint256 _amount,
            string calldata _baseURIForTokens,
            bytes calldata _data
        ) public virtual override returns (uint256 batchId) {
            if (!_canLazyMint()) {
                revert LazyMintUnauthorized();
            }
    
            if (_amount == 0) {
                revert LazyMintInvalidAmount();
            }
    
            uint256 startId = nextTokenIdToLazyMint;
    
            (nextTokenIdToLazyMint, batchId) = _batchMintMetadata(startId, _amount, _baseURIForTokens);
    
            emit TokensLazyMinted(startId, startId + _amount - 1, _baseURIForTokens, _data);
    
            return batchId;
        }
    
        /// @dev Returns whether lazy minting can be performed in the given execution context.
        function _canLazyMint() internal view virtual returns (bool);
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache 2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /// @author thirdweb
    
    import "../lib/Address.sol";
    import "./interface/IMulticall.sol";
    
    /**
     * @dev Provides a function to batch together multiple calls in a single external call.
     *
     * _Available since v4.1._
     */
    contract Multicall is IMulticall {
        /**
         *  @notice Receives and executes a batch of function calls on this contract.
         *  @dev Receives and executes a batch of function calls on this contract.
         *
         *  @param data The bytes data that makes up the batch of function calls to execute.
         *  @return results The bytes data that makes up the result of the batch of function calls executed.
         */
        function multicall(bytes[] calldata data) external returns (bytes[] memory results) {
            results = new bytes[](data.length);
            address sender = _msgSender();
            bool isForwarder = msg.sender != sender;
            for (uint256 i = 0; i < data.length; i++) {
                if (isForwarder) {
                    results[i] = Address.functionDelegateCall(address(this), abi.encodePacked(data[i], sender));
                } else {
                    results[i] = Address.functionDelegateCall(address(this), data[i]);
                }
            }
            return results;
        }
    
        /// @notice Returns the sender in the given execution context.
        function _msgSender() internal view virtual returns (address) {
            return msg.sender;
        }
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /// @author thirdweb
    
    import "./interface/IOwnable.sol";
    
    /**
     *  @title   Ownable
     *  @notice  Thirdweb's `Ownable` is a contract extension to be used with any base contract. It exposes functions for setting and reading
     *           who the 'owner' of the inheriting smart contract is, and lets the inheriting contract perform conditional logic that uses
     *           information about who the contract's owner is.
     */
    
    abstract contract Ownable is IOwnable {
        /// @dev The sender is not authorized to perform the action
        error OwnableUnauthorized();
    
        /// @dev Owner of the contract (purpose: OpenSea compatibility)
        address private _owner;
    
        /// @dev Reverts if caller is not the owner.
        modifier onlyOwner() {
            if (msg.sender != _owner) {
                revert OwnableUnauthorized();
            }
            _;
        }
    
        /**
         *  @notice Returns the owner of the contract.
         */
        function owner() public view override returns (address) {
            return _owner;
        }
    
        /**
         *  @notice Lets an authorized wallet set a new owner for the contract.
         *  @param _newOwner The address to set as the new owner of the contract.
         */
        function setOwner(address _newOwner) external override {
            if (!_canSetOwner()) {
                revert OwnableUnauthorized();
            }
            _setupOwner(_newOwner);
        }
    
        /// @dev Lets a contract admin set a new owner for the contract. The new owner must be a contract admin.
        function _setupOwner(address _newOwner) internal {
            address _prevOwner = _owner;
            _owner = _newOwner;
    
            emit OwnerUpdated(_prevOwner, _newOwner);
        }
    
        /// @dev Returns whether owner can be set in the given execution context.
        function _canSetOwner() internal view virtual returns (bool);
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /// @author thirdweb
    
    import "./interface/IPermissions.sol";
    import "../lib/Strings.sol";
    
    /**
     *  @title   Permissions
     *  @dev     This contracts provides extending-contracts with role-based access control mechanisms
     */
    contract Permissions is IPermissions {
        /// @dev The `account` is missing a role.
        error PermissionsUnauthorizedAccount(address account, bytes32 neededRole);
    
        /// @dev The `account` already is a holder of `role`
        error PermissionsAlreadyGranted(address account, bytes32 role);
    
        /// @dev Invalid priviledge to revoke
        error PermissionsInvalidPermission(address expected, address actual);
    
        /// @dev Map from keccak256 hash of a role => a map from address => whether address has role.
        mapping(bytes32 => mapping(address => bool)) private _hasRole;
    
        /// @dev Map from keccak256 hash of a role to role admin. See {getRoleAdmin}.
        mapping(bytes32 => bytes32) private _getRoleAdmin;
    
        /// @dev Default admin role for all roles. Only accounts with this role can grant/revoke other roles.
        bytes32 public constant DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE = 0x00;
    
        /// @dev Modifier that checks if an account has the specified role; reverts otherwise.
        modifier onlyRole(bytes32 role) {
            _checkRole(role, msg.sender);
            _;
        }
    
        /**
         *  @notice         Checks whether an account has a particular role.
         *  @dev            Returns `true` if `account` has been granted `role`.
         *
         *  @param role     keccak256 hash of the role. e.g. keccak256("TRANSFER_ROLE")
         *  @param account  Address of the account for which the role is being checked.
         */
        function hasRole(bytes32 role, address account) public view override returns (bool) {
            return _hasRole[role][account];
        }
    
        /**
         *  @notice         Checks whether an account has a particular role;
         *                  role restrictions can be swtiched on and off.
         *
         *  @dev            Returns `true` if `account` has been granted `role`.
         *                  Role restrictions can be swtiched on and off:
         *                      - If address(0) has ROLE, then the ROLE restrictions
         *                        don't apply.
         *                      - If address(0) does not have ROLE, then the ROLE
         *                        restrictions will apply.
         *
         *  @param role     keccak256 hash of the role. e.g. keccak256("TRANSFER_ROLE")
         *  @param account  Address of the account for which the role is being checked.
         */
        function hasRoleWithSwitch(bytes32 role, address account) public view returns (bool) {
            if (!_hasRole[role][address(0)]) {
                return _hasRole[role][account];
            }
    
            return true;
        }
    
        /**
         *  @notice         Returns the admin role that controls the specified role.
         *  @dev            See {grantRole} and {revokeRole}.
         *                  To change a role's admin, use {_setRoleAdmin}.
         *
         *  @param role     keccak256 hash of the role. e.g. keccak256("TRANSFER_ROLE")
         */
        function getRoleAdmin(bytes32 role) external view override returns (bytes32) {
            return _getRoleAdmin[role];
        }
    
        /**
         *  @notice         Grants a role to an account, if not previously granted.
         *  @dev            Caller must have admin role for the `role`.
         *                  Emits {RoleGranted Event}.
         *
         *  @param role     keccak256 hash of the role. e.g. keccak256("TRANSFER_ROLE")
         *  @param account  Address of the account to which the role is being granted.
         */
        function grantRole(bytes32 role, address account) public virtual override {
            _checkRole(_getRoleAdmin[role], msg.sender);
            if (_hasRole[role][account]) {
                revert PermissionsAlreadyGranted(account, role);
            }
            _setupRole(role, account);
        }
    
        /**
         *  @notice         Revokes role from an account.
         *  @dev            Caller must have admin role for the `role`.
         *                  Emits {RoleRevoked Event}.
         *
         *  @param role     keccak256 hash of the role. e.g. keccak256("TRANSFER_ROLE")
         *  @param account  Address of the account from which the role is being revoked.
         */
        function revokeRole(bytes32 role, address account) public virtual override {
            _checkRole(_getRoleAdmin[role], msg.sender);
            _revokeRole(role, account);
        }
    
        /**
         *  @notice         Revokes role from the account.
         *  @dev            Caller must have the `role`, with caller being the same as `account`.
         *                  Emits {RoleRevoked Event}.
         *
         *  @param role     keccak256 hash of the role. e.g. keccak256("TRANSFER_ROLE")
         *  @param account  Address of the account from which the role is being revoked.
         */
        function renounceRole(bytes32 role, address account) public virtual override {
            if (msg.sender != account) {
                revert PermissionsInvalidPermission(msg.sender, account);
            }
            _revokeRole(role, account);
        }
    
        /// @dev Sets `adminRole` as `role`'s admin role.
        function _setRoleAdmin(bytes32 role, bytes32 adminRole) internal virtual {
            bytes32 previousAdminRole = _getRoleAdmin[role];
            _getRoleAdmin[role] = adminRole;
            emit RoleAdminChanged(role, previousAdminRole, adminRole);
        }
    
        /// @dev Sets up `role` for `account`
        function _setupRole(bytes32 role, address account) internal virtual {
            _hasRole[role][account] = true;
            emit RoleGranted(role, account, msg.sender);
        }
    
        /// @dev Revokes `role` from `account`
        function _revokeRole(bytes32 role, address account) internal virtual {
            _checkRole(role, account);
            delete _hasRole[role][account];
            emit RoleRevoked(role, account, msg.sender);
        }
    
        /// @dev Checks `role` for `account`. Reverts with a message including the required role.
        function _checkRole(bytes32 role, address account) internal view virtual {
            if (!_hasRole[role][account]) {
                revert PermissionsUnauthorizedAccount(account, role);
            }
        }
    
        /// @dev Checks `role` for `account`. Reverts with a message including the required role.
        function _checkRoleWithSwitch(bytes32 role, address account) internal view virtual {
            if (!hasRoleWithSwitch(role, account)) {
                revert PermissionsUnauthorizedAccount(account, role);
            }
        }
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /// @author thirdweb
    
    import "./interface/IPermissionsEnumerable.sol";
    import "./Permissions.sol";
    
    /**
     *  @title   PermissionsEnumerable
     *  @dev     This contracts provides extending-contracts with role-based access control mechanisms.
     *           Also provides interfaces to view all members with a given role, and total count of members.
     */
    contract PermissionsEnumerable is IPermissionsEnumerable, Permissions {
        /**
         *  @notice A data structure to store data of members for a given role.
         *
         *  @param index    Current index in the list of accounts that have a role.
         *  @param members  map from index => address of account that has a role
         *  @param indexOf  map from address => index which the account has.
         */
        struct RoleMembers {
            uint256 index;
            mapping(uint256 => address) members;
            mapping(address => uint256) indexOf;
        }
    
        /// @dev map from keccak256 hash of a role to its members' data. See {RoleMembers}.
        mapping(bytes32 => RoleMembers) private roleMembers;
    
        /**
         *  @notice         Returns the role-member from a list of members for a role,
         *                  at a given index.
         *  @dev            Returns `member` who has `role`, at `index` of role-members list.
         *                  See struct {RoleMembers}, and mapping {roleMembers}
         *
         *  @param role     keccak256 hash of the role. e.g. keccak256("TRANSFER_ROLE")
         *  @param index    Index in list of current members for the role.
         *
         *  @return member  Address of account that has `role`
         */
        function getRoleMember(bytes32 role, uint256 index) external view override returns (address member) {
            uint256 currentIndex = roleMembers[role].index;
            uint256 check;
    
            for (uint256 i = 0; i < currentIndex; i += 1) {
                if (roleMembers[role].members[i] != address(0)) {
                    if (check == index) {
                        member = roleMembers[role].members[i];
                        return member;
                    }
                    check += 1;
                } else if (hasRole(role, address(0)) && i == roleMembers[role].indexOf[address(0)]) {
                    check += 1;
                }
            }
        }
    
        /**
         *  @notice         Returns total number of accounts that have a role.
         *  @dev            Returns `count` of accounts that have `role`.
         *                  See struct {RoleMembers}, and mapping {roleMembers}
         *
         *  @param role     keccak256 hash of the role. e.g. keccak256("TRANSFER_ROLE")
         *
         *  @return count   Total number of accounts that have `role`
         */
        function getRoleMemberCount(bytes32 role) external view override returns (uint256 count) {
            uint256 currentIndex = roleMembers[role].index;
    
            for (uint256 i = 0; i < currentIndex; i += 1) {
                if (roleMembers[role].members[i] != address(0)) {
                    count += 1;
                }
            }
            if (hasRole(role, address(0))) {
                count += 1;
            }
        }
    
        /// @dev Revokes `role` from `account`, and removes `account` from {roleMembers}
        ///      See {_removeMember}
        function _revokeRole(bytes32 role, address account) internal override {
            super._revokeRole(role, account);
            _removeMember(role, account);
        }
    
        /// @dev Grants `role` to `account`, and adds `account` to {roleMembers}
        ///      See {_addMember}
        function _setupRole(bytes32 role, address account) internal override {
            super._setupRole(role, account);
            _addMember(role, account);
        }
    
        /// @dev adds `account` to {roleMembers}, for `role`
        function _addMember(bytes32 role, address account) internal {
            uint256 idx = roleMembers[role].index;
            roleMembers[role].index += 1;
    
            roleMembers[role].members[idx] = account;
            roleMembers[role].indexOf[account] = idx;
        }
    
        /// @dev removes `account` from {roleMembers}, for `role`
        function _removeMember(bytes32 role, address account) internal {
            uint256 idx = roleMembers[role].indexOf[account];
    
            delete roleMembers[role].members[idx];
            delete roleMembers[role].indexOf[account];
        }
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /// @author thirdweb
    
    import "./interface/IPlatformFee.sol";
    
    /**
     *  @title   Platform Fee
     *  @notice  Thirdweb's `PlatformFee` is a contract extension to be used with any base contract. It exposes functions for setting and reading
     *           the recipient of platform fee and the platform fee basis points, and lets the inheriting contract perform conditional logic
     *           that uses information about platform fees, if desired.
     */
    
    abstract contract PlatformFee is IPlatformFee {
        /// @dev The sender is not authorized to perform the action
        error PlatformFeeUnauthorized();
    
        /// @dev The recipient is invalid
        error PlatformFeeInvalidRecipient(address recipient);
    
        /// @dev The fee bps exceeded the max value
        error PlatformFeeExceededMaxFeeBps(uint256 max, uint256 actual);
    
        /// @dev The address that receives all platform fees from all sales.
        address private platformFeeRecipient;
    
        /// @dev The % of primary sales collected as platform fees.
        uint16 private platformFeeBps;
    
        /// @dev Fee type variants: percentage fee and flat fee
        PlatformFeeType private platformFeeType;
    
        /// @dev The flat amount collected by the contract as fees on primary sales.
        uint256 private flatPlatformFee;
    
        /// @dev Returns the platform fee recipient and bps.
        function getPlatformFeeInfo() public view override returns (address, uint16) {
            return (platformFeeRecipient, uint16(platformFeeBps));
        }
    
        /// @dev Returns the platform fee bps and recipient.
        function getFlatPlatformFeeInfo() public view returns (address, uint256) {
            return (platformFeeRecipient, flatPlatformFee);
        }
    
        /// @dev Returns the platform fee type.
        function getPlatformFeeType() public view returns (PlatformFeeType) {
            return platformFeeType;
        }
    
        /**
         *  @notice         Updates the platform fee recipient and bps.
         *  @dev            Caller should be authorized to set platform fee info.
         *                  See {_canSetPlatformFeeInfo}.
         *                  Emits {PlatformFeeInfoUpdated Event}; See {_setupPlatformFeeInfo}.
         *
         *  @param _platformFeeRecipient   Address to be set as new platformFeeRecipient.
         *  @param _platformFeeBps         Updated platformFeeBps.
         */
        function setPlatformFeeInfo(address _platformFeeRecipient, uint256 _platformFeeBps) external override {
            if (!_canSetPlatformFeeInfo()) {
                revert PlatformFeeUnauthorized();
            }
            _setupPlatformFeeInfo(_platformFeeRecipient, _platformFeeBps);
        }
    
        /// @dev Sets the platform fee recipient and bps
        function _setupPlatformFeeInfo(address _platformFeeRecipient, uint256 _platformFeeBps) internal {
            if (_platformFeeBps > 10_000) {
                revert PlatformFeeExceededMaxFeeBps(10_000, _platformFeeBps);
            }
            if (_platformFeeRecipient == address(0)) {
                revert PlatformFeeInvalidRecipient(_platformFeeRecipient);
            }
    
            platformFeeBps = uint16(_platformFeeBps);
            platformFeeRecipient = _platformFeeRecipient;
    
            emit PlatformFeeInfoUpdated(_platformFeeRecipient, _platformFeeBps);
        }
    
        /// @notice Lets a module admin set a flat fee on primary sales.
        function setFlatPlatformFeeInfo(address _platformFeeRecipient, uint256 _flatFee) external {
            if (!_canSetPlatformFeeInfo()) {
                revert PlatformFeeUnauthorized();
            }
    
            _setupFlatPlatformFeeInfo(_platformFeeRecipient, _flatFee);
        }
    
        /// @dev Sets a flat fee on primary sales.
        function _setupFlatPlatformFeeInfo(address _platformFeeRecipient, uint256 _flatFee) internal {
            flatPlatformFee = _flatFee;
            platformFeeRecipient = _platformFeeRecipient;
    
            emit FlatPlatformFeeUpdated(_platformFeeRecipient, _flatFee);
        }
    
        /// @notice Lets a module admin set platform fee type.
        function setPlatformFeeType(PlatformFeeType _feeType) external {
            if (!_canSetPlatformFeeInfo()) {
                revert PlatformFeeUnauthorized();
            }
            _setupPlatformFeeType(_feeType);
        }
    
        /// @dev Sets platform fee type.
        function _setupPlatformFeeType(PlatformFeeType _feeType) internal {
            platformFeeType = _feeType;
    
            emit PlatformFeeTypeUpdated(_feeType);
        }
    
        /// @dev Returns whether platform fee info can be set in the given execution context.
        function _canSetPlatformFeeInfo() internal view virtual returns (bool);
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /// @author thirdweb
    
    import "./interface/IPrimarySale.sol";
    
    /**
     *  @title   Primary Sale
     *  @notice  Thirdweb's `PrimarySale` is a contract extension to be used with any base contract. It exposes functions for setting and reading
     *           the recipient of primary sales, and lets the inheriting contract perform conditional logic that uses information about
     *           primary sales, if desired.
     */
    
    abstract contract PrimarySale is IPrimarySale {
        /// @dev The sender is not authorized to perform the action
        error PrimarySaleUnauthorized();
    
        /// @dev The recipient is invalid
        error PrimarySaleInvalidRecipient(address recipient);
    
        /// @dev The address that receives all primary sales value.
        address private recipient;
    
        /// @dev Returns primary sale recipient address.
        function primarySaleRecipient() public view override returns (address) {
            return recipient;
        }
    
        /**
         *  @notice         Updates primary sale recipient.
         *  @dev            Caller should be authorized to set primary sales info.
         *                  See {_canSetPrimarySaleRecipient}.
         *                  Emits {PrimarySaleRecipientUpdated Event}; See {_setupPrimarySaleRecipient}.
         *
         *  @param _saleRecipient   Address to be set as new recipient of primary sales.
         */
        function setPrimarySaleRecipient(address _saleRecipient) external override {
            if (!_canSetPrimarySaleRecipient()) {
                revert PrimarySaleUnauthorized();
            }
            _setupPrimarySaleRecipient(_saleRecipient);
        }
    
        /// @dev Lets a contract admin set the recipient for all primary sales.
        function _setupPrimarySaleRecipient(address _saleRecipient) internal {
            if (_saleRecipient == address(0)) {
                revert PrimarySaleInvalidRecipient(_saleRecipient);
            }
    
            recipient = _saleRecipient;
            emit PrimarySaleRecipientUpdated(_saleRecipient);
        }
    
        /// @dev Returns whether primary sale recipient can be set in the given execution context.
        function _canSetPrimarySaleRecipient() internal view virtual returns (bool);
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /// @author thirdweb
    
    import "./interface/IRoyalty.sol";
    
    /**
     *  @title   Royalty
     *  @notice  Thirdweb's `Royalty` is a contract extension to be used with any base contract. It exposes functions for setting and reading
     *           the recipient of royalty fee and the royalty fee basis points, and lets the inheriting contract perform conditional logic
     *           that uses information about royalty fees, if desired.
     *
     *  @dev     The `Royalty` contract is ERC2981 compliant.
     */
    
    abstract contract Royalty is IRoyalty {
        /// @dev The sender is not authorized to perform the action
        error RoyaltyUnauthorized();
    
        /// @dev The recipient is invalid
        error RoyaltyInvalidRecipient(address recipient);
    
        /// @dev The fee bps exceeded the max value
        error RoyaltyExceededMaxFeeBps(uint256 max, uint256 actual);
    
        /// @dev The (default) address that receives all royalty value.
        address private royaltyRecipient;
    
        /// @dev The (default) % of a sale to take as royalty (in basis points).
        uint16 private royaltyBps;
    
        /// @dev Token ID => royalty recipient and bps for token
        mapping(uint256 => RoyaltyInfo) private royaltyInfoForToken;
    
        /**
         *  @notice   View royalty info for a given token and sale price.
         *  @dev      Returns royalty amount and recipient for `tokenId` and `salePrice`.
         *  @param tokenId          The tokenID of the NFT for which to query royalty info.
         *  @param salePrice        Sale price of the token.
         *
         *  @return receiver        Address of royalty recipient account.
         *  @return royaltyAmount   Royalty amount calculated at current royaltyBps value.
         */
        function royaltyInfo(
            uint256 tokenId,
            uint256 salePrice
        ) external view virtual override returns (address receiver, uint256 royaltyAmount) {
            (address recipient, uint256 bps) = getRoyaltyInfoForToken(tokenId);
            receiver = recipient;
            royaltyAmount = (salePrice * bps) / 10_000;
        }
    
        /**
         *  @notice          View royalty info for a given token.
         *  @dev             Returns royalty recipient and bps for `_tokenId`.
         *  @param _tokenId  The tokenID of the NFT for which to query royalty info.
         */
        function getRoyaltyInfoForToken(uint256 _tokenId) public view override returns (address, uint16) {
            RoyaltyInfo memory royaltyForToken = royaltyInfoForToken[_tokenId];
    
            return
                royaltyForToken.recipient == address(0)
                    ? (royaltyRecipient, uint16(royaltyBps))
                    : (royaltyForToken.recipient, uint16(royaltyForToken.bps));
        }
    
        /**
         *  @notice Returns the defualt royalty recipient and BPS for this contract's NFTs.
         */
        function getDefaultRoyaltyInfo() external view override returns (address, uint16) {
            return (royaltyRecipient, uint16(royaltyBps));
        }
    
        /**
         *  @notice         Updates default royalty recipient and bps.
         *  @dev            Caller should be authorized to set royalty info.
         *                  See {_canSetRoyaltyInfo}.
         *                  Emits {DefaultRoyalty Event}; See {_setupDefaultRoyaltyInfo}.
         *
         *  @param _royaltyRecipient   Address to be set as default royalty recipient.
         *  @param _royaltyBps         Updated royalty bps.
         */
        function setDefaultRoyaltyInfo(address _royaltyRecipient, uint256 _royaltyBps) external override {
            if (!_canSetRoyaltyInfo()) {
                revert RoyaltyUnauthorized();
            }
    
            _setupDefaultRoyaltyInfo(_royaltyRecipient, _royaltyBps);
        }
    
        /// @dev Lets a contract admin update the default royalty recipient and bps.
        function _setupDefaultRoyaltyInfo(address _royaltyRecipient, uint256 _royaltyBps) internal {
            if (_royaltyBps > 10_000) {
                revert RoyaltyExceededMaxFeeBps(10_000, _royaltyBps);
            }
    
            royaltyRecipient = _royaltyRecipient;
            royaltyBps = uint16(_royaltyBps);
    
            emit DefaultRoyalty(_royaltyRecipient, _royaltyBps);
        }
    
        /**
         *  @notice         Updates default royalty recipient and bps for a particular token.
         *  @dev            Sets royalty info for `_tokenId`. Caller should be authorized to set royalty info.
         *                  See {_canSetRoyaltyInfo}.
         *                  Emits {RoyaltyForToken Event}; See {_setupRoyaltyInfoForToken}.
         *
         *  @param _recipient   Address to be set as royalty recipient for given token Id.
         *  @param _bps         Updated royalty bps for the token Id.
         */
        function setRoyaltyInfoForToken(uint256 _tokenId, address _recipient, uint256 _bps) external override {
            if (!_canSetRoyaltyInfo()) {
                revert RoyaltyUnauthorized();
            }
    
            _setupRoyaltyInfoForToken(_tokenId, _recipient, _bps);
        }
    
        /// @dev Lets a contract admin set the royalty recipient and bps for a particular token Id.
        function _setupRoyaltyInfoForToken(uint256 _tokenId, address _recipient, uint256 _bps) internal {
            if (_bps > 10_000) {
                revert RoyaltyExceededMaxFeeBps(10_000, _bps);
            }
    
            royaltyInfoForToken[_tokenId] = RoyaltyInfo({ recipient: _recipient, bps: _bps });
    
            emit RoyaltyForToken(_tokenId, _recipient, _bps);
        }
    
        /// @dev Returns whether royalty info can be set in the given execution context.
        function _canSetRoyaltyInfo() internal view virtual returns (bool);
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /// @author thirdweb
    
    /**
     *  The interface `IClaimCondition` is written for thirdweb's 'Drop' contracts, which are distribution mechanisms for tokens.
     *
     *  A claim condition defines criteria under which accounts can mint tokens. Claim conditions can be overwritten
     *  or added to by the contract admin. At any moment, there is only one active claim condition.
     */
    
    interface IClaimCondition {
        /**
         *  @notice The criteria that make up a claim condition.
         *
         *  @param startTimestamp                 The unix timestamp after which the claim condition applies.
         *                                        The same claim condition applies until the `startTimestamp`
         *                                        of the next claim condition.
         *
         *  @param maxClaimableSupply             The maximum total number of tokens that can be claimed under
         *                                        the claim condition.
         *
         *  @param supplyClaimed                  At any given point, the number of tokens that have been claimed
         *                                        under the claim condition.
         *
         *  @param quantityLimitPerWallet         The maximum number of tokens that can be claimed by a wallet.
         *
         *  @param merkleRoot                     The allowlist of addresses that can claim tokens under the claim
         *                                        condition.
         *
         *  @param pricePerToken                  The price required to pay per token claimed.
         *
         *  @param currency                       The currency in which the `pricePerToken` must be paid.
         *
         *  @param metadata                       Claim condition metadata.
         */
        struct ClaimCondition {
            uint256 startTimestamp;
            uint256 maxClaimableSupply;
            uint256 supplyClaimed;
            uint256 quantityLimitPerWallet;
            bytes32 merkleRoot;
            uint256 pricePerToken;
            address currency;
            string metadata;
        }
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /// @author thirdweb
    
    import "./IClaimCondition.sol";
    
    /**
     *  The interface `IClaimConditionMultiPhase` is written for thirdweb's 'Drop' contracts, which are distribution mechanisms for tokens.
     *
     *  An authorized wallet can set a series of claim conditions, ordered by their respective `startTimestamp`.
     *  A claim condition defines criteria under which accounts can mint tokens. Claim conditions can be overwritten
     *  or added to by the contract admin. At any moment, there is only one active claim condition.
     */
    
    interface IClaimConditionMultiPhase is IClaimCondition {
        /**
         *  @notice The set of all claim conditions, at any given moment.
         *  Claim Phase ID = [currentStartId, currentStartId + length - 1];
         *
         *  @param currentStartId           The uid for the first claim condition amongst the current set of
         *                                  claim conditions. The uid for each next claim condition is one
         *                                  more than the previous claim condition's uid.
         *
         *  @param count                    The total number of phases / claim conditions in the list
         *                                  of claim conditions.
         *
         *  @param conditions                   The claim conditions at a given uid. Claim conditions
         *                                  are ordered in an ascending order by their `startTimestamp`.
         *
         *  @param supplyClaimedByWallet    Map from a claim condition uid and account to supply claimed by account.
         */
        struct ClaimConditionList {
            uint256 currentStartId;
            uint256 count;
            mapping(uint256 => ClaimCondition) conditions;
            mapping(uint256 => mapping(address => uint256)) supplyClaimedByWallet;
        }
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /// @author thirdweb
    
    /**
     *  Thirdweb's `ContractMetadata` is a contract extension for any base contracts. It lets you set a metadata URI
     *  for you contract.
     *
     *  Additionally, `ContractMetadata` is necessary for NFT contracts that want royalties to get distributed on OpenSea.
     */
    
    interface IContractMetadata {
        /// @dev Returns the metadata URI of the contract.
        function contractURI() external view returns (string memory);
    
        /**
         *  @dev Sets contract URI for the storefront-level metadata of the contract.
         *       Only module admin can call this function.
         */
        function setContractURI(string calldata _uri) external;
    
        /// @dev Emitted when the contract URI is updated.
        event ContractURIUpdated(string prevURI, string newURI);
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /// @author thirdweb
    
    /**
     *  Thirdweb's `DelayedReveal` is a contract extension for base NFT contracts. It lets you create batches of
     *  'delayed-reveal' NFTs. You can learn more about the usage of delayed reveal NFTs here - https://blog.thirdweb.com/delayed-reveal-nfts
     */
    
    interface IDelayedReveal {
        /// @dev Emitted when tokens are revealed.
        event TokenURIRevealed(uint256 indexed index, string revealedURI);
    
        /**
         *  @notice Reveals a batch of delayed reveal NFTs.
         *
         *  @param identifier The ID for the batch of delayed-reveal NFTs to reveal.
         *
         *  @param key        The key with which the base URI for the relevant batch of NFTs was encrypted.
         */
        function reveal(uint256 identifier, bytes calldata key) external returns (string memory revealedURI);
    
        /**
         *  @notice Performs XOR encryption/decryption.
         *
         *  @param data The data to encrypt. In the case of delayed-reveal NFTs, this is the "revealed" state
         *              base URI of the relevant batch of NFTs.
         *
         *  @param key  The key with which to encrypt data
         */
        function encryptDecrypt(bytes memory data, bytes calldata key) external pure returns (bytes memory result);
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /// @author thirdweb
    
    import "./IClaimConditionMultiPhase.sol";
    
    /**
     *  The interface `IDrop` is written for thirdweb's 'Drop' contracts, which are distribution mechanisms for tokens.
     *
     *  An authorized wallet can set a series of claim conditions, ordered by their respective `startTimestamp`.
     *  A claim condition defines criteria under which accounts can mint tokens. Claim conditions can be overwritten
     *  or added to by the contract admin. At any moment, there is only one active claim condition.
     */
    
    interface IDrop is IClaimConditionMultiPhase {
        /**
         *  @param proof Proof of concerned wallet's inclusion in an allowlist.
         *  @param quantityLimitPerWallet The total quantity of tokens the allowlisted wallet is eligible to claim over time.
         *  @param pricePerToken The price per token the allowlisted wallet must pay to claim tokens.
         *  @param currency The currency in which the allowlisted wallet must pay the price for claiming tokens.
         */
        struct AllowlistProof {
            bytes32[] proof;
            uint256 quantityLimitPerWallet;
            uint256 pricePerToken;
            address currency;
        }
    
        /// @notice Emitted when tokens are claimed via `claim`.
        event TokensClaimed(
            uint256 indexed claimConditionIndex,
            address indexed claimer,
            address indexed receiver,
            uint256 startTokenId,
            uint256 quantityClaimed
        );
    
        /// @notice Emitted when the contract's claim conditions are updated.
        event ClaimConditionsUpdated(ClaimCondition[] claimConditions, bool resetEligibility);
    
        /**
         *  @notice Lets an account claim a given quantity of NFTs.
         *
         *  @param receiver                       The receiver of the NFTs to claim.
         *  @param quantity                       The quantity of NFTs to claim.
         *  @param currency                       The currency in which to pay for the claim.
         *  @param pricePerToken                  The price per token to pay for the claim.
         *  @param allowlistProof                 The proof of the claimer's inclusion in the merkle root allowlist
         *                                        of the claim conditions that apply.
         *  @param data                           Arbitrary bytes data that can be leveraged in the implementation of this interface.
         */
        function claim(
            address receiver,
            uint256 quantity,
            address currency,
            uint256 pricePerToken,
            AllowlistProof calldata allowlistProof,
            bytes memory data
        ) external payable;
    
        /**
         *  @notice Lets a contract admin (account with `DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE`) set claim conditions.
         *
         *  @param phases                   Claim conditions in ascending order by `startTimestamp`.
         *
         *  @param resetClaimEligibility    Whether to honor the restrictions applied to wallets who have claimed tokens in the current conditions,
         *                                  in the new claim conditions being set.
         *
         */
        function setClaimConditions(ClaimCondition[] calldata phases, bool resetClaimEligibility) external;
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /// @author thirdweb
    
    /**
     *  Thirdweb's `LazyMint` is a contract extension for any base NFT contract. It lets you 'lazy mint' any number of NFTs
     *  at once. Here, 'lazy mint' means defining the metadata for particular tokenIds of your NFT contract, without actually
     *  minting a non-zero balance of NFTs of those tokenIds.
     */
    
    interface ILazyMint {
        /// @dev Emitted when tokens are lazy minted.
        event TokensLazyMinted(uint256 indexed startTokenId, uint256 endTokenId, string baseURI, bytes encryptedBaseURI);
    
        /**
         *  @notice Lazy mints a given amount of NFTs.
         *
         *  @param amount           The number of NFTs to lazy mint.
         *
         *  @param baseURIForTokens The base URI for the 'n' number of NFTs being lazy minted, where the metadata for each
         *                          of those NFTs is `${baseURIForTokens}/${tokenId}`.
         *
         *  @param extraData        Additional bytes data to be used at the discretion of the consumer of the contract.
         *
         *  @return batchId         A unique integer identifier for the batch of NFTs lazy minted together.
         */
        function lazyMint(
            uint256 amount,
            string calldata baseURIForTokens,
            bytes calldata extraData
        ) external returns (uint256 batchId);
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /// @author thirdweb
    
    /**
     * @dev Provides a function to batch together multiple calls in a single external call.
     *
     * _Available since v4.1._
     */
    interface IMulticall {
        /**
         * @dev Receives and executes a batch of function calls on this contract.
         */
        function multicall(bytes[] calldata data) external returns (bytes[] memory results);
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /// @author thirdweb
    
    /**
     *  Thirdweb's `Ownable` is a contract extension to be used with any base contract. It exposes functions for setting and reading
     *  who the 'owner' of the inheriting smart contract is, and lets the inheriting contract perform conditional logic that uses
     *  information about who the contract's owner is.
     */
    
    interface IOwnable {
        /// @dev Returns the owner of the contract.
        function owner() external view returns (address);
    
        /// @dev Lets a module admin set a new owner for the contract. The new owner must be a module admin.
        function setOwner(address _newOwner) external;
    
        /// @dev Emitted when a new Owner is set.
        event OwnerUpdated(address indexed prevOwner, address indexed newOwner);
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /// @author thirdweb
    
    /**
     * @dev External interface of AccessControl declared to support ERC165 detection.
     */
    interface IPermissions {
        /**
         * @dev Emitted when `newAdminRole` is set as ``role``'s admin role, replacing `previousAdminRole`
         *
         * `DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE` is the starting admin for all roles, despite
         * {RoleAdminChanged} not being emitted signaling this.
         *
         * _Available since v3.1._
         */
        event RoleAdminChanged(bytes32 indexed role, bytes32 indexed previousAdminRole, bytes32 indexed newAdminRole);
    
        /**
         * @dev Emitted when `account` is granted `role`.
         *
         * `sender` is the account that originated the contract call, an admin role
         * bearer except when using {AccessControl-_setupRole}.
         */
        event RoleGranted(bytes32 indexed role, address indexed account, address indexed sender);
    
        /**
         * @dev Emitted when `account` is revoked `role`.
         *
         * `sender` is the account that originated the contract call:
         *   - if using `revokeRole`, it is the admin role bearer
         *   - if using `renounceRole`, it is the role bearer (i.e. `account`)
         */
        event RoleRevoked(bytes32 indexed role, address indexed account, address indexed sender);
    
        /**
         * @dev Returns `true` if `account` has been granted `role`.
         */
        function hasRole(bytes32 role, address account) external view returns (bool);
    
        /**
         * @dev Returns the admin role that controls `role`. See {grantRole} and
         * {revokeRole}.
         *
         * To change a role's admin, use {AccessControl-_setRoleAdmin}.
         */
        function getRoleAdmin(bytes32 role) external view returns (bytes32);
    
        /**
         * @dev Grants `role` to `account`.
         *
         * If `account` had not been already granted `role`, emits a {RoleGranted}
         * event.
         *
         * Requirements:
         *
         * - the caller must have ``role``'s admin role.
         */
        function grantRole(bytes32 role, address account) external;
    
        /**
         * @dev Revokes `role` from `account`.
         *
         * If `account` had been granted `role`, emits a {RoleRevoked} event.
         *
         * Requirements:
         *
         * - the caller must have ``role``'s admin role.
         */
        function revokeRole(bytes32 role, address account) external;
    
        /**
         * @dev Revokes `role` from the calling account.
         *
         * Roles are often managed via {grantRole} and {revokeRole}: this function's
         * purpose is to provide a mechanism for accounts to lose their privileges
         * if they are compromised (such as when a trusted device is misplaced).
         *
         * If the calling account had been granted `role`, emits a {RoleRevoked}
         * event.
         *
         * Requirements:
         *
         * - the caller must be `account`.
         */
        function renounceRole(bytes32 role, address account) external;
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /// @author thirdweb
    
    import "./IPermissions.sol";
    
    /**
     * @dev External interface of AccessControlEnumerable declared to support ERC165 detection.
     */
    interface IPermissionsEnumerable is IPermissions {
        /**
         * @dev Returns one of the accounts that have `role`. `index` must be a
         * value between 0 and {getRoleMemberCount}, non-inclusive.
         *
         * Role bearers are not sorted in any particular way, and their ordering may
         * change at any point.
         *
         * WARNING: When using {getRoleMember} and {getRoleMemberCount}, make sure
         * you perform all queries on the same block. See the following
         * [forum post](https://forum.openzeppelin.com/t/iterating-over-elements-on-enumerableset-in-openzeppelin-contracts/2296)
         * for more information.
         */
        function getRoleMember(bytes32 role, uint256 index) external view returns (address);
    
        /**
         * @dev Returns the number of accounts that have `role`. Can be used
         * together with {getRoleMember} to enumerate all bearers of a role.
         */
        function getRoleMemberCount(bytes32 role) external view returns (uint256);
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /// @author thirdweb
    
    /**
     *  Thirdweb's `PlatformFee` is a contract extension to be used with any base contract. It exposes functions for setting and reading
     *  the recipient of platform fee and the platform fee basis points, and lets the inheriting contract perform conditional logic
     *  that uses information about platform fees, if desired.
     */
    
    interface IPlatformFee {
        /// @dev Fee type variants: percentage fee and flat fee
        enum PlatformFeeType {
            Bps,
            Flat
        }
    
        /// @dev Returns the platform fee bps and recipient.
        function getPlatformFeeInfo() external view returns (address, uint16);
    
        /// @dev Lets a module admin update the fees on primary sales.
        function setPlatformFeeInfo(address _platformFeeRecipient, uint256 _platformFeeBps) external;
    
        /// @dev Emitted when fee on primary sales is updated.
        event PlatformFeeInfoUpdated(address indexed platformFeeRecipient, uint256 platformFeeBps);
    
        /// @dev Emitted when the flat platform fee is updated.
        event FlatPlatformFeeUpdated(address platformFeeRecipient, uint256 flatFee);
    
        /// @dev Emitted when the platform fee type is updated.
        event PlatformFeeTypeUpdated(PlatformFeeType feeType);
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /// @author thirdweb
    
    /**
     *  Thirdweb's `Primary` is a contract extension to be used with any base contract. It exposes functions for setting and reading
     *  the recipient of primary sales, and lets the inheriting contract perform conditional logic that uses information about
     *  primary sales, if desired.
     */
    
    interface IPrimarySale {
        /// @dev The adress that receives all primary sales value.
        function primarySaleRecipient() external view returns (address);
    
        /// @dev Lets a module admin set the default recipient of all primary sales.
        function setPrimarySaleRecipient(address _saleRecipient) external;
    
        /// @dev Emitted when a new sale recipient is set.
        event PrimarySaleRecipientUpdated(address indexed recipient);
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /// @author thirdweb
    
    import "../../eip/interface/IERC2981.sol";
    
    /**
     *  Thirdweb's `Royalty` is a contract extension to be used with any base contract. It exposes functions for setting and reading
     *  the recipient of royalty fee and the royalty fee basis points, and lets the inheriting contract perform conditional logic
     *  that uses information about royalty fees, if desired.
     *
     *  The `Royalty` contract is ERC2981 compliant.
     */
    
    interface IRoyalty is IERC2981 {
        struct RoyaltyInfo {
            address recipient;
            uint256 bps;
        }
    
        /// @dev Returns the royalty recipient and fee bps.
        function getDefaultRoyaltyInfo() external view returns (address, uint16);
    
        /// @dev Lets a module admin update the royalty bps and recipient.
        function setDefaultRoyaltyInfo(address _royaltyRecipient, uint256 _royaltyBps) external;
    
        /// @dev Lets a module admin set the royalty recipient for a particular token Id.
        function setRoyaltyInfoForToken(uint256 tokenId, address recipient, uint256 bps) external;
    
        /// @dev Returns the royalty recipient for a particular token Id.
        function getRoyaltyInfoForToken(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (address, uint16);
    
        /// @dev Emitted when royalty info is updated.
        event DefaultRoyalty(address indexed newRoyaltyRecipient, uint256 newRoyaltyBps);
    
        /// @dev Emitted when royalty recipient for tokenId is set
        event RoyaltyForToken(uint256 indexed tokenId, address indexed royaltyRecipient, uint256 royaltyBps);
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
    // OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.0 (metatx/ERC2771Context.sol)
    
    pragma solidity ^0.8.11;
    
    import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/utils/ContextUpgradeable.sol";
    import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/proxy/utils/Initializable.sol";
    
    /**
     * @dev Context variant with ERC2771 support.
     */
    abstract contract ERC2771ContextUpgradeable is Initializable, ContextUpgradeable {
        mapping(address => bool) private _trustedForwarder;
    
        function __ERC2771Context_init(address[] memory trustedForwarder) internal onlyInitializing {
            __Context_init_unchained();
            __ERC2771Context_init_unchained(trustedForwarder);
        }
    
        function __ERC2771Context_init_unchained(address[] memory trustedForwarder) internal onlyInitializing {
            for (uint256 i = 0; i < trustedForwarder.length; i++) {
                _trustedForwarder[trustedForwarder[i]] = true;
            }
        }
    
        function isTrustedForwarder(address forwarder) public view virtual returns (bool) {
            return _trustedForwarder[forwarder];
        }
    
        function _msgSender() internal view virtual override returns (address sender) {
            if (isTrustedForwarder(msg.sender)) {
                // The assembly code is more direct than the Solidity version using `abi.decode`.
                assembly {
                    sender := shr(96, calldataload(sub(calldatasize(), 20)))
                }
            } else {
                return super._msgSender();
            }
        }
    
        function _msgData() internal view virtual override returns (bytes calldata) {
            if (isTrustedForwarder(msg.sender)) {
                return msg.data[:msg.data.length - 20];
            } else {
                return super._msgData();
            }
        }
    
        uint256[49] private __gap;
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
    // OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (token/ERC20/utils/SafeERC20.sol)
    
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    import "../../../../../eip/interface/IERC20.sol";
    import { Address } from "../../../../../lib/Address.sol";
    
    /**
     * @title SafeERC20
     * @dev Wrappers around ERC20 operations that throw on failure (when the token
     * contract returns false). Tokens that return no value (and instead revert or
     * throw on failure) are also supported, non-reverting calls are assumed to be
     * successful.
     * To use this library you can add a `using SafeERC20 for IERC20;` statement to your contract,
     * which allows you to call the safe operations as `token.safeTransfer(...)`, etc.
     */
    library SafeERC20 {
        using Address for address;
    
        function safeTransfer(IERC20 token, address to, uint256 value) internal {
            _callOptionalReturn(token, abi.encodeWithSelector(token.transfer.selector, to, value));
        }
    
        function safeTransferFrom(IERC20 token, address from, address to, uint256 value) internal {
            _callOptionalReturn(token, abi.encodeWithSelector(token.transferFrom.selector, from, to, value));
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Deprecated. This function has issues similar to the ones found in
         * {IERC20-approve}, and its usage is discouraged.
         *
         * Whenever possible, use {safeIncreaseAllowance} and
         * {safeDecreaseAllowance} instead.
         */
        function safeApprove(IERC20 token, address spender, uint256 value) internal {
            // safeApprove should only be called when setting an initial allowance,
            // or when resetting it to zero. To increase and decrease it, use
            // 'safeIncreaseAllowance' and 'safeDecreaseAllowance'
            require(
                (value == 0) || (token.allowance(address(this), spender) == 0),
                "SafeERC20: approve from non-zero to non-zero allowance"
            );
            _callOptionalReturn(token, abi.encodeWithSelector(token.approve.selector, spender, value));
        }
    
        function safeIncreaseAllowance(IERC20 token, address spender, uint256 value) internal {
            uint256 newAllowance = token.allowance(address(this), spender) + value;
            _callOptionalReturn(token, abi.encodeWithSelector(token.approve.selector, spender, newAllowance));
        }
    
        function safeDecreaseAllowance(IERC20 token, address spender, uint256 value) internal {
            unchecked {
                uint256 oldAllowance = token.allowance(address(this), spender);
                require(oldAllowance >= value, "SafeERC20: decreased allowance below zero");
                uint256 newAllowance = oldAllowance - value;
                _callOptionalReturn(token, abi.encodeWithSelector(token.approve.selector, spender, newAllowance));
            }
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Imitates a Solidity high-level call (i.e. a regular function call to a contract), relaxing the requirement
         * on the return value: the return value is optional (but if data is returned, it must not be false).
         * @param token The token targeted by the call.
         * @param data The call data (encoded using abi.encode or one of its variants).
         */
        function _callOptionalReturn(IERC20 token, bytes memory data) private {
            // We need to perform a low level call here, to bypass Solidity's return data size checking mechanism, since
            // we're implementing it ourselves. We use {Address.functionCall} to perform this call, which verifies that
            // the target address contains contract code and also asserts for success in the low-level call.
    
            bytes memory returndata = address(token).functionCall(data, "SafeERC20: low-level call failed");
            if (returndata.length > 0) {
                // Return data is optional
                require(abi.decode(returndata, (bool)), "SafeERC20: ERC20 operation did not succeed");
            }
        }
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    interface IWETH {
        function deposit() external payable;
    
        function withdraw(uint256 amount) external;
    
        function transfer(address to, uint256 value) external returns (bool);
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.1;
    
    /// @author thirdweb, OpenZeppelin Contracts (v4.9.0)
    
    /**
     * @dev Collection of functions related to the address type
     */
    library Address {
        /**
         * @dev Returns true if `account` is a contract.
         *
         * [IMPORTANT]
         * ====
         * It is unsafe to assume that an address for which this function returns
         * false is an externally-owned account (EOA) and not a contract.
         *
         * Among others, `isContract` will return false for the following
         * types of addresses:
         *
         *  - an externally-owned account
         *  - a contract in construction
         *  - an address where a contract will be created
         *  - an address where a contract lived, but was destroyed
         *
         * Furthermore, `isContract` will also return true if the target contract within
         * the same transaction is already scheduled for destruction by `SELFDESTRUCT`,
         * which only has an effect at the end of a transaction.
         * ====
         *
         * [IMPORTANT]
         * ====
         * You shouldn't rely on `isContract` to protect against flash loan attacks!
         *
         * Preventing calls from contracts is highly discouraged. It breaks composability, breaks support for smart wallets
         * like Gnosis Safe, and does not provide security since it can be circumvented by calling from a contract
         * constructor.
         * ====
         */
        function isContract(address account) internal view returns (bool) {
            // This method relies on extcodesize/address.code.length, which returns 0
            // for contracts in construction, since the code is only stored at the end
            // of the constructor execution.
    
            return account.code.length > 0;
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Replacement for Solidity's `transfer`: sends `amount` wei to
         * `recipient`, forwarding all available gas and reverting on errors.
         *
         * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-1884[EIP1884] increases the gas cost
         * of certain opcodes, possibly making contracts go over the 2300 gas limit
         * imposed by `transfer`, making them unable to receive funds via
         * `transfer`. {sendValue} removes this limitation.
         *
         * https://consensys.net/diligence/blog/2019/09/stop-using-soliditys-transfer-now/[Learn more].
         *
         * IMPORTANT: because control is transferred to `recipient`, care must be
         * taken to not create reentrancy vulnerabilities. Consider using
         * {ReentrancyGuard} or the
         * https://solidity.readthedocs.io/en/v0.8.0/security-considerations.html#use-the-checks-effects-interactions-pattern[checks-effects-interactions pattern].
         */
        function sendValue(address payable recipient, uint256 amount) internal {
            require(address(this).balance >= amount, "Address: insufficient balance");
    
            (bool success, ) = recipient.call{ value: amount }("");
            require(success, "Address: unable to send value, recipient may have reverted");
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Performs a Solidity function call using a low level `call`. A
         * plain `call` is an unsafe replacement for a function call: use this
         * function instead.
         *
         * If `target` reverts with a revert reason, it is bubbled up by this
         * function (like regular Solidity function calls).
         *
         * Returns the raw returned data. To convert to the expected return value,
         * use https://solidity.readthedocs.io/en/latest/units-and-global-variables.html?highlight=abi.decode#abi-encoding-and-decoding-functions[`abi.decode`].
         *
         * Requirements:
         *
         * - `target` must be a contract.
         * - calling `target` with `data` must not revert.
         *
         * _Available since v3.1._
         */
        function functionCall(address target, bytes memory data) internal returns (bytes memory) {
            return functionCallWithValue(target, data, 0, "Address: low-level call failed");
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`], but with
         * `errorMessage` as a fallback revert reason when `target` reverts.
         *
         * _Available since v3.1._
         */
        function functionCall(
            address target,
            bytes memory data,
            string memory errorMessage
        ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
            return functionCallWithValue(target, data, 0, errorMessage);
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`],
         * but also transferring `value` wei to `target`.
         *
         * Requirements:
         *
         * - the calling contract must have an ETH balance of at least `value`.
         * - the called Solidity function must be `payable`.
         *
         * _Available since v3.1._
         */
        function functionCallWithValue(address target, bytes memory data, uint256 value) internal returns (bytes memory) {
            return functionCallWithValue(target, data, value, "Address: low-level call with value failed");
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCallWithValue-address-bytes-uint256-}[`functionCallWithValue`], but
         * with `errorMessage` as a fallback revert reason when `target` reverts.
         *
         * _Available since v3.1._
         */
        function functionCallWithValue(
            address target,
            bytes memory data,
            uint256 value,
            string memory errorMessage
        ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
            require(address(this).balance >= value, "Address: insufficient balance for call");
            (bool success, bytes memory returndata) = target.call{ value: value }(data);
            return verifyCallResultFromTarget(target, success, returndata, errorMessage);
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`],
         * but performing a static call.
         *
         * _Available since v3.3._
         */
        function functionStaticCall(address target, bytes memory data) internal view returns (bytes memory) {
            return functionStaticCall(target, data, "Address: low-level static call failed");
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-string-}[`functionCall`],
         * but performing a static call.
         *
         * _Available since v3.3._
         */
        function functionStaticCall(
            address target,
            bytes memory data,
            string memory errorMessage
        ) internal view returns (bytes memory) {
            (bool success, bytes memory returndata) = target.staticcall(data);
            return verifyCallResultFromTarget(target, success, returndata, errorMessage);
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`],
         * but performing a delegate call.
         *
         * _Available since v3.4._
         */
        function functionDelegateCall(address target, bytes memory data) internal returns (bytes memory) {
            return functionDelegateCall(target, data, "Address: low-level delegate call failed");
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-string-}[`functionCall`],
         * but performing a delegate call.
         *
         * _Available since v3.4._
         */
        function functionDelegateCall(
            address target,
            bytes memory data,
            string memory errorMessage
        ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
            (bool success, bytes memory returndata) = target.delegatecall(data);
            return verifyCallResultFromTarget(target, success, returndata, errorMessage);
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Tool to verify that a low level call to smart-contract was successful, and revert (either by bubbling
         * the revert reason or using the provided one) in case of unsuccessful call or if target was not a contract.
         *
         * _Available since v4.8._
         */
        function verifyCallResultFromTarget(
            address target,
            bool success,
            bytes memory returndata,
            string memory errorMessage
        ) internal view returns (bytes memory) {
            if (success) {
                if (returndata.length == 0) {
                    // only check isContract if the call was successful and the return data is empty
                    // otherwise we already know that it was a contract
                    require(isContract(target), "Address: call to non-contract");
                }
                return returndata;
            } else {
                _revert(returndata, errorMessage);
            }
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Tool to verify that a low level call was successful, and revert if it wasn't, either by bubbling the
         * revert reason or using the provided one.
         *
         * _Available since v4.3._
         */
        function verifyCallResult(
            bool success,
            bytes memory returndata,
            string memory errorMessage
        ) internal pure returns (bytes memory) {
            if (success) {
                return returndata;
            } else {
                _revert(returndata, errorMessage);
            }
        }
    
        function _revert(bytes memory returndata, string memory errorMessage) private pure {
            // Look for revert reason and bubble it up if present
            if (returndata.length > 0) {
                // The easiest way to bubble the revert reason is using memory via assembly
                /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
                assembly {
                    let returndata_size := mload(returndata)
                    revert(add(32, returndata), returndata_size)
                }
            } else {
                revert(errorMessage);
            }
        }
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /// @author thirdweb
    
    // Helper interfaces
    import { IWETH } from "../infra/interface/IWETH.sol";
    import { SafeERC20, IERC20 } from "../external-deps/openzeppelin/token/ERC20/utils/SafeERC20.sol";
    
    library CurrencyTransferLib {
        using SafeERC20 for IERC20;
    
        error CurrencyTransferLibMismatchedValue(uint256 expected, uint256 actual);
        error CurrencyTransferLibFailedNativeTransfer(address recipient, uint256 value);
    
        /// @dev The address interpreted as native token of the chain.
        address public constant NATIVE_TOKEN = 0xEeeeeEeeeEeEeeEeEeEeeEEEeeeeEeeeeeeeEEeE;
    
        /// @dev Transfers a given amount of currency.
        function transferCurrency(address _currency, address _from, address _to, uint256 _amount) internal {
            if (_amount == 0) {
                return;
            }
    
            if (_currency == NATIVE_TOKEN) {
                safeTransferNativeToken(_to, _amount);
            } else {
                safeTransferERC20(_currency, _from, _to, _amount);
            }
        }
    
        /// @dev Transfers a given amount of currency. (With native token wrapping)
        function transferCurrencyWithWrapper(
            address _currency,
            address _from,
            address _to,
            uint256 _amount,
            address _nativeTokenWrapper
        ) internal {
            if (_amount == 0) {
                return;
            }
    
            if (_currency == NATIVE_TOKEN) {
                if (_from == address(this)) {
                    // withdraw from weth then transfer withdrawn native token to recipient
                    IWETH(_nativeTokenWrapper).withdraw(_amount);
                    safeTransferNativeTokenWithWrapper(_to, _amount, _nativeTokenWrapper);
                } else if (_to == address(this)) {
                    // store native currency in weth
                    if (_amount != msg.value) {
                        revert CurrencyTransferLibMismatchedValue(msg.value, _amount);
                    }
                    IWETH(_nativeTokenWrapper).deposit{ value: _amount }();
                } else {
                    safeTransferNativeTokenWithWrapper(_to, _amount, _nativeTokenWrapper);
                }
            } else {
                safeTransferERC20(_currency, _from, _to, _amount);
            }
        }
    
        /// @dev Transfer `amount` of ERC20 token from `from` to `to`.
        function safeTransferERC20(address _currency, address _from, address _to, uint256 _amount) internal {
            if (_from == _to) {
                return;
            }
    
            if (_from == address(this)) {
                IERC20(_currency).safeTransfer(_to, _amount);
            } else {
                IERC20(_currency).safeTransferFrom(_from, _to, _amount);
            }
        }
    
        /// @dev Transfers `amount` of native token to `to`.
        function safeTransferNativeToken(address to, uint256 value) internal {
            // solhint-disable avoid-low-level-calls
            // slither-disable-next-line low-level-calls
            (bool success, ) = to.call{ value: value }("");
            if (!success) {
                revert CurrencyTransferLibFailedNativeTransfer(to, value);
            }
        }
    
        /// @dev Transfers `amount` of native token to `to`. (With native token wrapping)
        function safeTransferNativeTokenWithWrapper(address to, uint256 value, address _nativeTokenWrapper) internal {
            // solhint-disable avoid-low-level-calls
            // slither-disable-next-line low-level-calls
            (bool success, ) = to.call{ value: value }("");
            if (!success) {
                IWETH(_nativeTokenWrapper).deposit{ value: value }();
                IERC20(_nativeTokenWrapper).safeTransfer(to, value);
            }
        }
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache 2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /// @author OpenZeppelin, thirdweb
    
    library MerkleProof {
        function verify(bytes32[] calldata proof, bytes32 root, bytes32 leaf) internal pure returns (bool, uint256) {
            bytes32 computedHash = leaf;
            uint256 index = 0;
    
            for (uint256 i = 0; i < proof.length; i++) {
                index *= 2;
                bytes32 proofElement = proof[i];
    
                if (computedHash <= proofElement) {
                    // Hash(current computed hash + current element of the proof)
                    computedHash = _efficientHash(computedHash, proofElement);
                } else {
                    // Hash(current element of the proof + current computed hash)
                    computedHash = _efficientHash(proofElement, computedHash);
                    index += 1;
                }
            }
    
            // Check if the computed hash (root) is equal to the provided root
            return (computedHash == root, index);
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Implementation of keccak256(abi.encode(a, b)) that doesn't allocate or expand memory.
         */
        function _efficientHash(bytes32 a, bytes32 b) private pure returns (bytes32 value) {
            /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
            assembly {
                mstore(0x00, a)
                mstore(0x20, b)
                value := keccak256(0x00, 0x40)
            }
        }
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /// @author thirdweb
    
    /**
     * @dev String operations.
     */
    library Strings {
        bytes16 private constant _HEX_SYMBOLS = "0123456789abcdef";
    
        /**
         * @dev Converts a `uint256` to its ASCII `string` decimal representation.
         */
        function toString(uint256 value) internal pure returns (string memory) {
            // Inspired by OraclizeAPI's implementation - MIT licence
            // https://github.com/oraclize/ethereum-api/blob/b42146b063c7d6ee1358846c198246239e9360e8/oraclizeAPI_0.4.25.sol
    
            if (value == 0) {
                return "0";
            }
            uint256 temp = value;
            uint256 digits;
            while (temp != 0) {
                digits++;
                temp /= 10;
            }
            bytes memory buffer = new bytes(digits);
            while (value != 0) {
                digits -= 1;
                buffer[digits] = bytes1(uint8(48 + uint256(value % 10)));
                value /= 10;
            }
            return string(buffer);
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Converts a `uint256` to its ASCII `string` hexadecimal representation.
         */
        function toHexString(uint256 value) internal pure returns (string memory) {
            if (value == 0) {
                return "0x00";
            }
            uint256 temp = value;
            uint256 length = 0;
            while (temp != 0) {
                length++;
                temp >>= 8;
            }
            return toHexString(value, length);
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Converts a `uint256` to its ASCII `string` hexadecimal representation with fixed length.
         */
        function toHexString(uint256 value, uint256 length) internal pure returns (string memory) {
            bytes memory buffer = new bytes(2 * length + 2);
            buffer[0] = "0";
            buffer[1] = "x";
            for (uint256 i = 2 * length + 1; i > 1; --i) {
                buffer[i] = _HEX_SYMBOLS[value & 0xf];
                value >>= 4;
            }
            require(value == 0, "Strings: hex length insufficient");
            return string(buffer);
        }
    
        /// @dev Returns the hexadecimal representation of `value`.
        /// The output is prefixed with "0x", encoded using 2 hexadecimal digits per byte,
        /// and the alphabets are capitalized conditionally according to
        /// https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-55
        function toHexStringChecksummed(address value) internal pure returns (string memory str) {
            str = toHexString(value);
            /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
            assembly {
                let mask := shl(6, div(not(0), 255)) // `0b010000000100000000 ...`
                let o := add(str, 0x22)
                let hashed := and(keccak256(o, 40), mul(34, mask)) // `0b10001000 ... `
                let t := shl(240, 136) // `0b10001000 << 240`
                for {
                    let i := 0
                } 1 {
    
                } {
                    mstore(add(i, i), mul(t, byte(i, hashed)))
                    i := add(i, 1)
                    if eq(i, 20) {
                        break
                    }
                }
                mstore(o, xor(mload(o), shr(1, and(mload(0x00), and(mload(o), mask)))))
                o := add(o, 0x20)
                mstore(o, xor(mload(o), shr(1, and(mload(0x20), and(mload(o), mask)))))
            }
        }
    
        /// @dev Returns the hexadecimal representation of `value`.
        /// The output is prefixed with "0x" and encoded using 2 hexadecimal digits per byte.
        function toHexString(address value) internal pure returns (string memory str) {
            str = toHexStringNoPrefix(value);
            /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
            assembly {
                let strLength := add(mload(str), 2) // Compute the length.
                mstore(str, 0x3078) // Write the "0x" prefix.
                str := sub(str, 2) // Move the pointer.
                mstore(str, strLength) // Write the length.
            }
        }
    
        /// @dev Returns the hexadecimal representation of `value`.
        /// The output is encoded using 2 hexadecimal digits per byte.
        function toHexStringNoPrefix(address value) internal pure returns (string memory str) {
            /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
            assembly {
                str := mload(0x40)
    
                // Allocate the memory.
                // We need 0x20 bytes for the trailing zeros padding, 0x20 bytes for the length,
                // 0x02 bytes for the prefix, and 0x28 bytes for the digits.
                // The next multiple of 0x20 above (0x20 + 0x20 + 0x02 + 0x28) is 0x80.
                mstore(0x40, add(str, 0x80))
    
                // Store "0123456789abcdef" in scratch space.
                mstore(0x0f, 0x30313233343536373839616263646566)
    
                str := add(str, 2)
                mstore(str, 40)
    
                let o := add(str, 0x20)
                mstore(add(o, 40), 0)
    
                value := shl(96, value)
    
                // We write the string from rightmost digit to leftmost digit.
                // The following is essentially a do-while loop that also handles the zero case.
                for {
                    let i := 0
                } 1 {
    
                } {
                    let p := add(o, add(i, i))
                    let temp := byte(i, value)
                    mstore8(add(p, 1), mload(and(temp, 15)))
                    mstore8(p, mload(shr(4, temp)))
                    i := add(i, 1)
                    if eq(i, 20) {
                        break
                    }
                }
            }
        }
    
        /// @dev Returns the hex encoded string from the raw bytes.
        /// The output is encoded using 2 hexadecimal digits per byte.
        function toHexString(bytes memory raw) internal pure returns (string memory str) {
            str = toHexStringNoPrefix(raw);
            /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
            assembly {
                let strLength := add(mload(str), 2) // Compute the length.
                mstore(str, 0x3078) // Write the "0x" prefix.
                str := sub(str, 2) // Move the pointer.
                mstore(str, strLength) // Write the length.
            }
        }
    
        /// @dev Returns the hex encoded string from the raw bytes.
        /// The output is encoded using 2 hexadecimal digits per byte.
        function toHexStringNoPrefix(bytes memory raw) internal pure returns (string memory str) {
            /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
            assembly {
                let length := mload(raw)
                str := add(mload(0x40), 2) // Skip 2 bytes for the optional prefix.
                mstore(str, add(length, length)) // Store the length of the output.
    
                // Store "0123456789abcdef" in scratch space.
                mstore(0x0f, 0x30313233343536373839616263646566)
    
                let o := add(str, 0x20)
                let end := add(raw, length)
    
                for {
    
                } iszero(eq(raw, end)) {
    
                } {
                    raw := add(raw, 1)
                    mstore8(add(o, 1), mload(and(mload(raw), 15)))
                    mstore8(o, mload(and(shr(4, mload(raw)), 15)))
                    o := add(o, 2)
                }
                mstore(o, 0) // Zeroize the slot after the string.
                mstore(0x40, add(o, 0x20)) // Allocate the memory.
            }
        }
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.11;
    
    /// @author thirdweb
    
    //   $$\     $$\       $$\                 $$\                         $$\
    //   $$ |    $$ |      \__|                $$ |                        $$ |
    // $$$$$$\   $$$$$$$\  $$\  $$$$$$\   $$$$$$$ |$$\  $$\  $$\  $$$$$$\  $$$$$$$\
    // \_$$  _|  $$  __$$\ $$ |$$  __$$\ $$  __$$ |$$ | $$ | $$ |$$  __$$\ $$  __$$\
    //   $$ |    $$ |  $$ |$$ |$$ |  \__|$$ /  $$ |$$ | $$ | $$ |$$$$$$$$ |$$ |  $$ |
    //   $$ |$$\ $$ |  $$ |$$ |$$ |      $$ |  $$ |$$ | $$ | $$ |$$   ____|$$ |  $$ |
    //   \$$$$  |$$ |  $$ |$$ |$$ |      \$$$$$$$ |\$$$$$\$$$$  |\$$$$$$$\ $$$$$$$  |
    //    \____/ \__|  \__|\__|\__|       \_______| \_____\____/  \_______|\_______/
    
    //  ==========  External imports    ==========
    
    import "../../extension/Multicall.sol";
    import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/utils/StringsUpgradeable.sol";
    import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/interfaces/IERC2981Upgradeable.sol";
    
    import "../../eip/ERC721AVirtualApproveUpgradeable.sol";
    
    //  ==========  Internal imports    ==========
    
    import "../../external-deps/openzeppelin/metatx/ERC2771ContextUpgradeable.sol";
    import "../../lib/CurrencyTransferLib.sol";
    
    //  ==========  Features    ==========
    
    import "../../extension/ContractMetadata.sol";
    import "../../extension/PlatformFee.sol";
    import "../../extension/Royalty.sol";
    import "../../extension/PrimarySale.sol";
    import "../../extension/Ownable.sol";
    import "../../extension/DelayedReveal.sol";
    import "../../extension/LazyMint.sol";
    import "../../extension/PermissionsEnumerable.sol";
    import "../../extension/Drop.sol";
    
    contract DropERC721 is
        Initializable,
        ContractMetadata,
        PlatformFee,
        Royalty,
        PrimarySale,
        Ownable,
        DelayedReveal,
        LazyMint,
        PermissionsEnumerable,
        Drop,
        ERC2771ContextUpgradeable,
        Multicall,
        ERC721AUpgradeable
    {
        using StringsUpgradeable for uint256;
    
        /*///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
                                State variables
        //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////*/
    
        /// @dev Only transfers to or from TRANSFER_ROLE holders are valid, when transfers are restricted.
        bytes32 private transferRole;
        /// @dev Only MINTER_ROLE holders can sign off on `MintRequest`s and lazy mint tokens.
        bytes32 private minterRole;
        /// @dev Only METADATA_ROLE holders can reveal the URI for a batch of delayed reveal NFTs, and update or freeze batch metadata.
        bytes32 private metadataRole;
    
        /// @dev Max bps in the thirdweb system.
        uint256 private constant MAX_BPS = 10_000;
    
        /// @dev Global max total supply of NFTs.
        uint256 public maxTotalSupply;
    
        /// @dev Emitted when the global max supply of tokens is updated.
        event MaxTotalSupplyUpdated(uint256 maxTotalSupply);
    
        /*///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
                        Constructor + initializer logic
        //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////*/
    
        constructor() initializer {}
    
        /// @dev Initializes the contract, like a constructor.
        function initialize(
            address _defaultAdmin,
            string memory _name,
            string memory _symbol,
            string memory _contractURI,
            address[] memory _trustedForwarders,
            address _saleRecipient,
            address _royaltyRecipient,
            uint128 _royaltyBps,
            uint128 _platformFeeBps,
            address _platformFeeRecipient
        ) external initializer {
            bytes32 _transferRole = keccak256("TRANSFER_ROLE");
            bytes32 _minterRole = keccak256("MINTER_ROLE");
            bytes32 _metadataRole = keccak256("METADATA_ROLE");
    
            // Initialize inherited contracts, most base-like -> most derived.
            __ERC2771Context_init(_trustedForwarders);
            __ERC721A_init(_name, _symbol);
    
            _setupContractURI(_contractURI);
            _setupOwner(_defaultAdmin);
    
            _setupRole(DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE, _defaultAdmin);
            _setupRole(_minterRole, _defaultAdmin);
            _setupRole(_transferRole, _defaultAdmin);
            _setupRole(_transferRole, address(0));
            _setupRole(_metadataRole, _defaultAdmin);
            _setRoleAdmin(_metadataRole, _metadataRole);
    
            _setupPlatformFeeInfo(_platformFeeRecipient, _platformFeeBps);
            _setupDefaultRoyaltyInfo(_royaltyRecipient, _royaltyBps);
            _setupPrimarySaleRecipient(_saleRecipient);
    
            transferRole = _transferRole;
            minterRole = _minterRole;
            metadataRole = _metadataRole;
        }
    
        /*///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
                            ERC 165 / 721 / 2981 logic
        //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////*/
    
        /// @dev Returns the URI for a given tokenId.
        function tokenURI(uint256 _tokenId) public view override returns (string memory) {
            (uint256 batchId, ) = _getBatchId(_tokenId);
            string memory batchUri = _getBaseURI(_tokenId);
    
            if (isEncryptedBatch(batchId)) {
                return string(abi.encodePacked(batchUri, "0"));
            } else {
                return string(abi.encodePacked(batchUri, _tokenId.toString()));
            }
        }
    
        /// @dev See ERC 165
        function supportsInterface(
            bytes4 interfaceId
        ) public view virtual override(ERC721AUpgradeable, IERC165) returns (bool) {
            return super.supportsInterface(interfaceId) || type(IERC2981Upgradeable).interfaceId == interfaceId;
        }
    
        /*///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
                            Contract identifiers
        //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////*/
    
        function contractType() external pure returns (bytes32) {
            return bytes32("DropERC721");
        }
    
        function contractVersion() external pure returns (uint8) {
            return uint8(4);
        }
    
        /*///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
                        Lazy minting + delayed-reveal logic
        //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////*/
    
        /**
         *  @dev Lets an account with `MINTER_ROLE` lazy mint 'n' NFTs.
         *       The URIs for each token is the provided `_baseURIForTokens` + `{tokenId}`.
         */
        function lazyMint(
            uint256 _amount,
            string calldata _baseURIForTokens,
            bytes calldata _data
        ) public override returns (uint256 batchId) {
            if (_data.length > 0) {
                (bytes memory encryptedURI, bytes32 provenanceHash) = abi.decode(_data, (bytes, bytes32));
                if (encryptedURI.length != 0 && provenanceHash != "") {
                    _setEncryptedData(nextTokenIdToLazyMint + _amount, _data);
                }
            }
    
            return super.lazyMint(_amount, _baseURIForTokens, _data);
        }
    
        /// @dev Lets an account with `METADATA_ROLE` reveal the URI for a batch of 'delayed-reveal' NFTs.
        /// @param _index the ID of a token with the desired batch.
        /// @param _key the key to decrypt the batch's URI.
        function reveal(
            uint256 _index,
            bytes calldata _key
        ) external onlyRole(metadataRole) returns (string memory revealedURI) {
            uint256 batchId = getBatchIdAtIndex(_index);
            revealedURI = getRevealURI(batchId, _key);
    
            _setEncryptedData(batchId, "");
            _setBaseURI(batchId, revealedURI);
    
            emit TokenURIRevealed(_index, revealedURI);
        }
    
        /**
         * @notice Updates the base URI for a batch of tokens. Can only be called if the batch has been revealed/is not encrypted.
         *
         * @param _index Index of the desired batch in batchIds array
         * @param _uri   the new base URI for the batch.
         */
        function updateBatchBaseURI(uint256 _index, string calldata _uri) external onlyRole(metadataRole) {
            require(!isEncryptedBatch(getBatchIdAtIndex(_index)), "Encrypted batch");
            uint256 batchId = getBatchIdAtIndex(_index);
            _setBaseURI(batchId, _uri);
        }
    
        /**
         * @notice Freezes the base URI for a batch of tokens.
         *
         * @param _index Index of the desired batch in batchIds array.
         */
        function freezeBatchBaseURI(uint256 _index) external onlyRole(metadataRole) {
            require(!isEncryptedBatch(getBatchIdAtIndex(_index)), "Encrypted batch");
            uint256 batchId = getBatchIdAtIndex(_index);
            _freezeBaseURI(batchId);
        }
    
        /*///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
                            Setter functions
        //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////*/
    
        /// @dev Lets a contract admin set the global maximum supply for collection's NFTs.
        function setMaxTotalSupply(uint256 _maxTotalSupply) external onlyRole(DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE) {
            maxTotalSupply = _maxTotalSupply;
            emit MaxTotalSupplyUpdated(_maxTotalSupply);
        }
    
        /*///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
                            Internal functions
        //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////*/
    
        /// @dev Runs before every `claim` function call.
        function _beforeClaim(
            address,
            uint256 _quantity,
            address,
            uint256,
            AllowlistProof calldata,
            bytes memory
        ) internal view override {
            require(_currentIndex + _quantity <= nextTokenIdToLazyMint, "!Tokens");
            require(maxTotalSupply == 0 || _currentIndex + _quantity <= maxTotalSupply, "!Supply");
        }
    
        /// @dev Collects and distributes the primary sale value of NFTs being claimed.
        function _collectPriceOnClaim(
            address _primarySaleRecipient,
            uint256 _quantityToClaim,
            address _currency,
            uint256 _pricePerToken
        ) internal override {
            if (_pricePerToken == 0) {
                require(msg.value == 0, "!V");
                return;
            }
    
            (address platformFeeRecipient, uint16 platformFeeBps) = getPlatformFeeInfo();
    
            address saleRecipient = _primarySaleRecipient == address(0) ? primarySaleRecipient() : _primarySaleRecipient;
    
            uint256 totalPrice = _quantityToClaim * _pricePerToken;
            uint256 platformFees = (totalPrice * platformFeeBps) / MAX_BPS;
    
            bool validMsgValue;
            if (_currency == CurrencyTransferLib.NATIVE_TOKEN) {
                validMsgValue = msg.value == totalPrice;
            } else {
                validMsgValue = msg.value == 0;
            }
            require(validMsgValue, "!V");
    
            CurrencyTransferLib.transferCurrency(_currency, _msgSender(), platformFeeRecipient, platformFees);
            CurrencyTransferLib.transferCurrency(_currency, _msgSender(), saleRecipient, totalPrice - platformFees);
        }
    
        /// @dev Transfers the NFTs being claimed.
        function _transferTokensOnClaim(
            address _to,
            uint256 _quantityBeingClaimed
        ) internal override returns (uint256 startTokenId) {
            startTokenId = _currentIndex;
            _safeMint(_to, _quantityBeingClaimed);
        }
    
        /// @dev Checks whether platform fee info can be set in the given execution context.
        function _canSetPlatformFeeInfo() internal view override returns (bool) {
            return hasRole(DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE, _msgSender());
        }
    
        /// @dev Checks whether primary sale recipient can be set in the given execution context.
        function _canSetPrimarySaleRecipient() internal view override returns (bool) {
            return hasRole(DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE, _msgSender());
        }
    
        /// @dev Checks whether owner can be set in the given execution context.
        function _canSetOwner() internal view override returns (bool) {
            return hasRole(DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE, _msgSender());
        }
    
        /// @dev Checks whether royalty info can be set in the given execution context.
        function _canSetRoyaltyInfo() internal view override returns (bool) {
            return hasRole(DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE, _msgSender());
        }
    
        /// @dev Checks whether contract metadata can be set in the given execution context.
        function _canSetContractURI() internal view override returns (bool) {
            return hasRole(DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE, _msgSender());
        }
    
        /// @dev Checks whether platform fee info can be set in the given execution context.
        function _canSetClaimConditions() internal view override returns (bool) {
            return hasRole(DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE, _msgSender());
        }
    
        /// @dev Returns whether lazy minting can be done in the given execution context.
        function _canLazyMint() internal view virtual override returns (bool) {
            return hasRole(minterRole, _msgSender());
        }
    
        /*///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
                            Miscellaneous
        //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////*/
    
        /**
         * Returns the total amount of tokens minted in the contract.
         */
        function totalMinted() external view returns (uint256) {
            return _totalMinted();
        }
    
        /// @dev The tokenId of the next NFT that will be minted / lazy minted.
        function nextTokenIdToMint() external view returns (uint256) {
            return nextTokenIdToLazyMint;
        }
    
        /// @dev The next token ID of the NFT that can be claimed.
        function nextTokenIdToClaim() external view returns (uint256) {
            return _currentIndex;
        }
    
        /// @dev Burns `tokenId`. See {ERC721-_burn}.
        function burn(uint256 tokenId) external virtual {
            // note: ERC721AUpgradeable's `_burn(uint256,bool)` internally checks for token approvals.
            _burn(tokenId, true);
        }
    
        /// @dev See {ERC721-_beforeTokenTransfer}.
        function _beforeTokenTransfers(
            address from,
            address to,
            uint256 startTokenId,
            uint256 quantity
        ) internal virtual override {
            super._beforeTokenTransfers(from, to, startTokenId, quantity);
    
            // if transfer is restricted on the contract, we still want to allow burning and minting
            if (!hasRole(transferRole, address(0)) && from != address(0) && to != address(0)) {
                if (!hasRole(transferRole, from) && !hasRole(transferRole, to)) {
                    revert("!Transfer-Role");
                }
            }
        }
    
        function _dropMsgSender() internal view virtual override returns (address) {
            return _msgSender();
        }
    
        function _msgSender()
            internal
            view
            virtual
            override(ContextUpgradeable, ERC2771ContextUpgradeable, Multicall)
            returns (address sender)
        {
            return ERC2771ContextUpgradeable._msgSender();
        }
    
        function _msgData()
            internal
            view
            virtual
            override(ContextUpgradeable, ERC2771ContextUpgradeable)
            returns (bytes calldata)
        {
            return ERC2771ContextUpgradeable._msgData();
        }
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
    // ERC721A Contracts v3.3.0
    // Creator: Chiru Labs
    
    pragma solidity ^0.8.4;
    
    import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/token/ERC721/IERC721Upgradeable.sol";
    import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/token/ERC721/extensions/IERC721MetadataUpgradeable.sol";
    
    /**
     * @dev Interface of an ERC721A compliant contract.
     */
    interface IERC721AUpgradeable is IERC721Upgradeable, IERC721MetadataUpgradeable {
        /**
         * The caller must own the token or be an approved operator.
         */
        error ApprovalCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();
    
        /**
         * The token does not exist.
         */
        error ApprovalQueryForNonexistentToken();
    
        /**
         * The caller cannot approve to their own address.
         */
        error ApproveToCaller();
    
        /**
         * The caller cannot approve to the current owner.
         */
        error ApprovalToCurrentOwner();
    
        /**
         * Cannot query the balance for the zero address.
         */
        error BalanceQueryForZeroAddress();
    
        /**
         * Cannot mint to the zero address.
         */
        error MintToZeroAddress();
    
        /**
         * The quantity of tokens minted must be more than zero.
         */
        error MintZeroQuantity();
    
        /**
         * The token does not exist.
         */
        error OwnerQueryForNonexistentToken();
    
        /**
         * The caller must own the token or be an approved operator.
         */
        error TransferCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();
    
        /**
         * The token must be owned by `from`.
         */
        error TransferFromIncorrectOwner();
    
        /**
         * Cannot safely transfer to a contract that does not implement the ERC721Receiver interface.
         */
        error TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer();
    
        /**
         * Cannot transfer to the zero address.
         */
        error TransferToZeroAddress();
    
        /**
         * The token does not exist.
         */
        error URIQueryForNonexistentToken();
    
        // Compiler will pack this into a single 256bit word.
        struct TokenOwnership {
            // The address of the owner.
            address addr;
            // Keeps track of the start time of ownership with minimal overhead for tokenomics.
            uint64 startTimestamp;
            // Whether the token has been burned.
            bool burned;
        }
    
        // Compiler will pack this into a single 256bit word.
        struct AddressData {
            // Realistically, 2**64-1 is more than enough.
            uint64 balance;
            // Keeps track of mint count with minimal overhead for tokenomics.
            uint64 numberMinted;
            // Keeps track of burn count with minimal overhead for tokenomics.
            uint64 numberBurned;
            // For miscellaneous variable(s) pertaining to the address
            // (e.g. number of whitelist mint slots used).
            // If there are multiple variables, please pack them into a uint64.
            uint64 aux;
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Returns the total amount of tokens stored by the contract.
         * 
         * Burned tokens are calculated here, use `_totalMinted()` if you want to count just minted tokens.
         */
        function totalSupply() external view returns (uint256);
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
    // OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.9.0) (interfaces/IERC2981.sol)
    
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    import "../utils/introspection/IERC165Upgradeable.sol";
    
    /**
     * @dev Interface for the NFT Royalty Standard.
     *
     * A standardized way to retrieve royalty payment information for non-fungible tokens (NFTs) to enable universal
     * support for royalty payments across all NFT marketplaces and ecosystem participants.
     *
     * _Available since v4.5._
     */
    interface IERC2981Upgradeable is IERC165Upgradeable {
        /**
         * @dev Returns how much royalty is owed and to whom, based on a sale price that may be denominated in any unit of
         * exchange. The royalty amount is denominated and should be paid in that same unit of exchange.
         */
        function royaltyInfo(
            uint256 tokenId,
            uint256 salePrice
        ) external view returns (address receiver, uint256 royaltyAmount);
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
    // OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.9.0) (proxy/utils/Initializable.sol)
    
    pragma solidity ^0.8.2;
    
    import "../../utils/AddressUpgradeable.sol";
    
    /**
     * @dev This is a base contract to aid in writing upgradeable contracts, or any kind of contract that will be deployed
     * behind a proxy. Since proxied contracts do not make use of a constructor, it's common to move constructor logic to an
     * external initializer function, usually called `initialize`. It then becomes necessary to protect this initializer
     * function so it can only be called once. The {initializer} modifier provided by this contract will have this effect.
     *
     * The initialization functions use a version number. Once a version number is used, it is consumed and cannot be
     * reused. This mechanism prevents re-execution of each "step" but allows the creation of new initialization steps in
     * case an upgrade adds a module that needs to be initialized.
     *
     * For example:
     *
     * [.hljs-theme-light.nopadding]
     * ```solidity
     * contract MyToken is ERC20Upgradeable {
     *     function initialize() initializer public {
     *         __ERC20_init("MyToken", "MTK");
     *     }
     * }
     *
     * contract MyTokenV2 is MyToken, ERC20PermitUpgradeable {
     *     function initializeV2() reinitializer(2) public {
     *         __ERC20Permit_init("MyToken");
     *     }
     * }
     * ```
     *
     * TIP: To avoid leaving the proxy in an uninitialized state, the initializer function should be called as early as
     * possible by providing the encoded function call as the `_data` argument to {ERC1967Proxy-constructor}.
     *
     * CAUTION: When used with inheritance, manual care must be taken to not invoke a parent initializer twice, or to ensure
     * that all initializers are idempotent. This is not verified automatically as constructors are by Solidity.
     *
     * [CAUTION]
     * ====
     * Avoid leaving a contract uninitialized.
     *
     * An uninitialized contract can be taken over by an attacker. This applies to both a proxy and its implementation
     * contract, which may impact the proxy. To prevent the implementation contract from being used, you should invoke
     * the {_disableInitializers} function in the constructor to automatically lock it when it is deployed:
     *
     * [.hljs-theme-light.nopadding]
     * ```
     * /// @custom:oz-upgrades-unsafe-allow constructor
     * constructor() {
     *     _disableInitializers();
     * }
     * ```
     * ====
     */
    abstract contract Initializable {
        /**
         * @dev Indicates that the contract has been initialized.
         * @custom:oz-retyped-from bool
         */
        uint8 private _initialized;
    
        /**
         * @dev Indicates that the contract is in the process of being initialized.
         */
        bool private _initializing;
    
        /**
         * @dev Triggered when the contract has been initialized or reinitialized.
         */
        event Initialized(uint8 version);
    
        /**
         * @dev A modifier that defines a protected initializer function that can be invoked at most once. In its scope,
         * `onlyInitializing` functions can be used to initialize parent contracts.
         *
         * Similar to `reinitializer(1)`, except that functions marked with `initializer` can be nested in the context of a
         * constructor.
         *
         * Emits an {Initialized} event.
         */
        modifier initializer() {
            bool isTopLevelCall = !_initializing;
            require(
                (isTopLevelCall && _initialized < 1) || (!AddressUpgradeable.isContract(address(this)) && _initialized == 1),
                "Initializable: contract is already initialized"
            );
            _initialized = 1;
            if (isTopLevelCall) {
                _initializing = true;
            }
            _;
            if (isTopLevelCall) {
                _initializing = false;
                emit Initialized(1);
            }
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev A modifier that defines a protected reinitializer function that can be invoked at most once, and only if the
         * contract hasn't been initialized to a greater version before. In its scope, `onlyInitializing` functions can be
         * used to initialize parent contracts.
         *
         * A reinitializer may be used after the original initialization step. This is essential to configure modules that
         * are added through upgrades and that require initialization.
         *
         * When `version` is 1, this modifier is similar to `initializer`, except that functions marked with `reinitializer`
         * cannot be nested. If one is invoked in the context of another, execution will revert.
         *
         * Note that versions can jump in increments greater than 1; this implies that if multiple reinitializers coexist in
         * a contract, executing them in the right order is up to the developer or operator.
         *
         * WARNING: setting the version to 255 will prevent any future reinitialization.
         *
         * Emits an {Initialized} event.
         */
        modifier reinitializer(uint8 version) {
            require(!_initializing && _initialized < version, "Initializable: contract is already initialized");
            _initialized = version;
            _initializing = true;
            _;
            _initializing = false;
            emit Initialized(version);
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Modifier to protect an initialization function so that it can only be invoked by functions with the
         * {initializer} and {reinitializer} modifiers, directly or indirectly.
         */
        modifier onlyInitializing() {
            require(_initializing, "Initializable: contract is not initializing");
            _;
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Locks the contract, preventing any future reinitialization. This cannot be part of an initializer call.
         * Calling this in the constructor of a contract will prevent that contract from being initialized or reinitialized
         * to any version. It is recommended to use this to lock implementation contracts that are designed to be called
         * through proxies.
         *
         * Emits an {Initialized} event the first time it is successfully executed.
         */
        function _disableInitializers() internal virtual {
            require(!_initializing, "Initializable: contract is initializing");
            if (_initialized != type(uint8).max) {
                _initialized = type(uint8).max;
                emit Initialized(type(uint8).max);
            }
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Returns the highest version that has been initialized. See {reinitializer}.
         */
        function _getInitializedVersion() internal view returns (uint8) {
            return _initialized;
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Returns `true` if the contract is currently initializing. See {onlyInitializing}.
         */
        function _isInitializing() internal view returns (bool) {
            return _initializing;
        }
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
    // OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.6.0) (token/ERC721/IERC721Receiver.sol)
    
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /**
     * @title ERC721 token receiver interface
     * @dev Interface for any contract that wants to support safeTransfers
     * from ERC721 asset contracts.
     */
    interface IERC721ReceiverUpgradeable {
        /**
         * @dev Whenever an {IERC721} `tokenId` token is transferred to this contract via {IERC721-safeTransferFrom}
         * by `operator` from `from`, this function is called.
         *
         * It must return its Solidity selector to confirm the token transfer.
         * If any other value is returned or the interface is not implemented by the recipient, the transfer will be reverted.
         *
         * The selector can be obtained in Solidity with `IERC721Receiver.onERC721Received.selector`.
         */
        function onERC721Received(
            address operator,
            address from,
            uint256 tokenId,
            bytes calldata data
        ) external returns (bytes4);
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
    // OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.9.0) (token/ERC721/IERC721.sol)
    
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    import "../../utils/introspection/IERC165Upgradeable.sol";
    
    /**
     * @dev Required interface of an ERC721 compliant contract.
     */
    interface IERC721Upgradeable is IERC165Upgradeable {
        /**
         * @dev Emitted when `tokenId` token is transferred from `from` to `to`.
         */
        event Transfer(address indexed from, address indexed to, uint256 indexed tokenId);
    
        /**
         * @dev Emitted when `owner` enables `approved` to manage the `tokenId` token.
         */
        event Approval(address indexed owner, address indexed approved, uint256 indexed tokenId);
    
        /**
         * @dev Emitted when `owner` enables or disables (`approved`) `operator` to manage all of its assets.
         */
        event ApprovalForAll(address indexed owner, address indexed operator, bool approved);
    
        /**
         * @dev Returns the number of tokens in ``owner``'s account.
         */
        function balanceOf(address owner) external view returns (uint256 balance);
    
        /**
         * @dev Returns the owner of the `tokenId` token.
         *
         * Requirements:
         *
         * - `tokenId` must exist.
         */
        function ownerOf(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (address owner);
    
        /**
         * @dev Safely transfers `tokenId` token from `from` to `to`.
         *
         * Requirements:
         *
         * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
         * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
         * - `tokenId` token must exist and be owned by `from`.
         * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be approved to move this token by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
         * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received}, which is called upon a safe transfer.
         *
         * Emits a {Transfer} event.
         */
        function safeTransferFrom(address from, address to, uint256 tokenId, bytes calldata data) external;
    
        /**
         * @dev Safely transfers `tokenId` token from `from` to `to`, checking first that contract recipients
         * are aware of the ERC721 protocol to prevent tokens from being forever locked.
         *
         * Requirements:
         *
         * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
         * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
         * - `tokenId` token must exist and be owned by `from`.
         * - If the caller is not `from`, it must have been allowed to move this token by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
         * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received}, which is called upon a safe transfer.
         *
         * Emits a {Transfer} event.
         */
        function safeTransferFrom(address from, address to, uint256 tokenId) external;
    
        /**
         * @dev Transfers `tokenId` token from `from` to `to`.
         *
         * WARNING: Note that the caller is responsible to confirm that the recipient is capable of receiving ERC721
         * or else they may be permanently lost. Usage of {safeTransferFrom} prevents loss, though the caller must
         * understand this adds an external call which potentially creates a reentrancy vulnerability.
         *
         * Requirements:
         *
         * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
         * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
         * - `tokenId` token must be owned by `from`.
         * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be approved to move this token by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
         *
         * Emits a {Transfer} event.
         */
        function transferFrom(address from, address to, uint256 tokenId) external;
    
        /**
         * @dev Gives permission to `to` to transfer `tokenId` token to another account.
         * The approval is cleared when the token is transferred.
         *
         * Only a single account can be approved at a time, so approving the zero address clears previous approvals.
         *
         * Requirements:
         *
         * - The caller must own the token or be an approved operator.
         * - `tokenId` must exist.
         *
         * Emits an {Approval} event.
         */
        function approve(address to, uint256 tokenId) external;
    
        /**
         * @dev Approve or remove `operator` as an operator for the caller.
         * Operators can call {transferFrom} or {safeTransferFrom} for any token owned by the caller.
         *
         * Requirements:
         *
         * - The `operator` cannot be the caller.
         *
         * Emits an {ApprovalForAll} event.
         */
        function setApprovalForAll(address operator, bool approved) external;
    
        /**
         * @dev Returns the account approved for `tokenId` token.
         *
         * Requirements:
         *
         * - `tokenId` must exist.
         */
        function getApproved(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (address operator);
    
        /**
         * @dev Returns if the `operator` is allowed to manage all of the assets of `owner`.
         *
         * See {setApprovalForAll}
         */
        function isApprovedForAll(address owner, address operator) external view returns (bool);
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
    // OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (token/ERC721/extensions/IERC721Metadata.sol)
    
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    import "../IERC721Upgradeable.sol";
    
    /**
     * @title ERC-721 Non-Fungible Token Standard, optional metadata extension
     * @dev See https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-721
     */
    interface IERC721MetadataUpgradeable is IERC721Upgradeable {
        /**
         * @dev Returns the token collection name.
         */
        function name() external view returns (string memory);
    
        /**
         * @dev Returns the token collection symbol.
         */
        function symbol() external view returns (string memory);
    
        /**
         * @dev Returns the Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) for `tokenId` token.
         */
        function tokenURI(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (string memory);
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
    // OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.9.0) (utils/Address.sol)
    
    pragma solidity ^0.8.1;
    
    /**
     * @dev Collection of functions related to the address type
     */
    library AddressUpgradeable {
        /**
         * @dev Returns true if `account` is a contract.
         *
         * [IMPORTANT]
         * ====
         * It is unsafe to assume that an address for which this function returns
         * false is an externally-owned account (EOA) and not a contract.
         *
         * Among others, `isContract` will return false for the following
         * types of addresses:
         *
         *  - an externally-owned account
         *  - a contract in construction
         *  - an address where a contract will be created
         *  - an address where a contract lived, but was destroyed
         *
         * Furthermore, `isContract` will also return true if the target contract within
         * the same transaction is already scheduled for destruction by `SELFDESTRUCT`,
         * which only has an effect at the end of a transaction.
         * ====
         *
         * [IMPORTANT]
         * ====
         * You shouldn't rely on `isContract` to protect against flash loan attacks!
         *
         * Preventing calls from contracts is highly discouraged. It breaks composability, breaks support for smart wallets
         * like Gnosis Safe, and does not provide security since it can be circumvented by calling from a contract
         * constructor.
         * ====
         */
        function isContract(address account) internal view returns (bool) {
            // This method relies on extcodesize/address.code.length, which returns 0
            // for contracts in construction, since the code is only stored at the end
            // of the constructor execution.
    
            return account.code.length > 0;
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Replacement for Solidity's `transfer`: sends `amount` wei to
         * `recipient`, forwarding all available gas and reverting on errors.
         *
         * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-1884[EIP1884] increases the gas cost
         * of certain opcodes, possibly making contracts go over the 2300 gas limit
         * imposed by `transfer`, making them unable to receive funds via
         * `transfer`. {sendValue} removes this limitation.
         *
         * https://consensys.net/diligence/blog/2019/09/stop-using-soliditys-transfer-now/[Learn more].
         *
         * IMPORTANT: because control is transferred to `recipient`, care must be
         * taken to not create reentrancy vulnerabilities. Consider using
         * {ReentrancyGuard} or the
         * https://solidity.readthedocs.io/en/v0.8.0/security-considerations.html#use-the-checks-effects-interactions-pattern[checks-effects-interactions pattern].
         */
        function sendValue(address payable recipient, uint256 amount) internal {
            require(address(this).balance >= amount, "Address: insufficient balance");
    
            (bool success, ) = recipient.call{value: amount}("");
            require(success, "Address: unable to send value, recipient may have reverted");
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Performs a Solidity function call using a low level `call`. A
         * plain `call` is an unsafe replacement for a function call: use this
         * function instead.
         *
         * If `target` reverts with a revert reason, it is bubbled up by this
         * function (like regular Solidity function calls).
         *
         * Returns the raw returned data. To convert to the expected return value,
         * use https://solidity.readthedocs.io/en/latest/units-and-global-variables.html?highlight=abi.decode#abi-encoding-and-decoding-functions[`abi.decode`].
         *
         * Requirements:
         *
         * - `target` must be a contract.
         * - calling `target` with `data` must not revert.
         *
         * _Available since v3.1._
         */
        function functionCall(address target, bytes memory data) internal returns (bytes memory) {
            return functionCallWithValue(target, data, 0, "Address: low-level call failed");
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`], but with
         * `errorMessage` as a fallback revert reason when `target` reverts.
         *
         * _Available since v3.1._
         */
        function functionCall(
            address target,
            bytes memory data,
            string memory errorMessage
        ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
            return functionCallWithValue(target, data, 0, errorMessage);
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`],
         * but also transferring `value` wei to `target`.
         *
         * Requirements:
         *
         * - the calling contract must have an ETH balance of at least `value`.
         * - the called Solidity function must be `payable`.
         *
         * _Available since v3.1._
         */
        function functionCallWithValue(address target, bytes memory data, uint256 value) internal returns (bytes memory) {
            return functionCallWithValue(target, data, value, "Address: low-level call with value failed");
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCallWithValue-address-bytes-uint256-}[`functionCallWithValue`], but
         * with `errorMessage` as a fallback revert reason when `target` reverts.
         *
         * _Available since v3.1._
         */
        function functionCallWithValue(
            address target,
            bytes memory data,
            uint256 value,
            string memory errorMessage
        ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
            require(address(this).balance >= value, "Address: insufficient balance for call");
            (bool success, bytes memory returndata) = target.call{value: value}(data);
            return verifyCallResultFromTarget(target, success, returndata, errorMessage);
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`],
         * but performing a static call.
         *
         * _Available since v3.3._
         */
        function functionStaticCall(address target, bytes memory data) internal view returns (bytes memory) {
            return functionStaticCall(target, data, "Address: low-level static call failed");
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-string-}[`functionCall`],
         * but performing a static call.
         *
         * _Available since v3.3._
         */
        function functionStaticCall(
            address target,
            bytes memory data,
            string memory errorMessage
        ) internal view returns (bytes memory) {
            (bool success, bytes memory returndata) = target.staticcall(data);
            return verifyCallResultFromTarget(target, success, returndata, errorMessage);
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`],
         * but performing a delegate call.
         *
         * _Available since v3.4._
         */
        function functionDelegateCall(address target, bytes memory data) internal returns (bytes memory) {
            return functionDelegateCall(target, data, "Address: low-level delegate call failed");
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-string-}[`functionCall`],
         * but performing a delegate call.
         *
         * _Available since v3.4._
         */
        function functionDelegateCall(
            address target,
            bytes memory data,
            string memory errorMessage
        ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
            (bool success, bytes memory returndata) = target.delegatecall(data);
            return verifyCallResultFromTarget(target, success, returndata, errorMessage);
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Tool to verify that a low level call to smart-contract was successful, and revert (either by bubbling
         * the revert reason or using the provided one) in case of unsuccessful call or if target was not a contract.
         *
         * _Available since v4.8._
         */
        function verifyCallResultFromTarget(
            address target,
            bool success,
            bytes memory returndata,
            string memory errorMessage
        ) internal view returns (bytes memory) {
            if (success) {
                if (returndata.length == 0) {
                    // only check isContract if the call was successful and the return data is empty
                    // otherwise we already know that it was a contract
                    require(isContract(target), "Address: call to non-contract");
                }
                return returndata;
            } else {
                _revert(returndata, errorMessage);
            }
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Tool to verify that a low level call was successful, and revert if it wasn't, either by bubbling the
         * revert reason or using the provided one.
         *
         * _Available since v4.3._
         */
        function verifyCallResult(
            bool success,
            bytes memory returndata,
            string memory errorMessage
        ) internal pure returns (bytes memory) {
            if (success) {
                return returndata;
            } else {
                _revert(returndata, errorMessage);
            }
        }
    
        function _revert(bytes memory returndata, string memory errorMessage) private pure {
            // Look for revert reason and bubble it up if present
            if (returndata.length > 0) {
                // The easiest way to bubble the revert reason is using memory via assembly
                /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
                assembly {
                    let returndata_size := mload(returndata)
                    revert(add(32, returndata), returndata_size)
                }
            } else {
                revert(errorMessage);
            }
        }
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
    // OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (utils/Context.sol)
    
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    import "../proxy/utils/Initializable.sol";
    
    /**
     * @dev Provides information about the current execution context, including the
     * sender of the transaction and its data. While these are generally available
     * via msg.sender and msg.data, they should not be accessed in such a direct
     * manner, since when dealing with meta-transactions the account sending and
     * paying for execution may not be the actual sender (as far as an application
     * is concerned).
     *
     * This contract is only required for intermediate, library-like contracts.
     */
    abstract contract ContextUpgradeable is Initializable {
        function __Context_init() internal onlyInitializing {
        }
    
        function __Context_init_unchained() internal onlyInitializing {
        }
        function _msgSender() internal view virtual returns (address) {
            return msg.sender;
        }
    
        function _msgData() internal view virtual returns (bytes calldata) {
            return msg.data;
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev This empty reserved space is put in place to allow future versions to add new
         * variables without shifting down storage in the inheritance chain.
         * See https://docs.openzeppelin.com/contracts/4.x/upgradeable#storage_gaps
         */
        uint256[50] private __gap;
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
    // OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.9.0) (utils/Strings.sol)
    
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    import "./math/MathUpgradeable.sol";
    import "./math/SignedMathUpgradeable.sol";
    
    /**
     * @dev String operations.
     */
    library StringsUpgradeable {
        bytes16 private constant _SYMBOLS = "0123456789abcdef";
        uint8 private constant _ADDRESS_LENGTH = 20;
    
        /**
         * @dev Converts a `uint256` to its ASCII `string` decimal representation.
         */
        function toString(uint256 value) internal pure returns (string memory) {
            unchecked {
                uint256 length = MathUpgradeable.log10(value) + 1;
                string memory buffer = new string(length);
                uint256 ptr;
                /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
                assembly {
                    ptr := add(buffer, add(32, length))
                }
                while (true) {
                    ptr--;
                    /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
                    assembly {
                        mstore8(ptr, byte(mod(value, 10), _SYMBOLS))
                    }
                    value /= 10;
                    if (value == 0) break;
                }
                return buffer;
            }
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Converts a `int256` to its ASCII `string` decimal representation.
         */
        function toString(int256 value) internal pure returns (string memory) {
            return string(abi.encodePacked(value < 0 ? "-" : "", toString(SignedMathUpgradeable.abs(value))));
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Converts a `uint256` to its ASCII `string` hexadecimal representation.
         */
        function toHexString(uint256 value) internal pure returns (string memory) {
            unchecked {
                return toHexString(value, MathUpgradeable.log256(value) + 1);
            }
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Converts a `uint256` to its ASCII `string` hexadecimal representation with fixed length.
         */
        function toHexString(uint256 value, uint256 length) internal pure returns (string memory) {
            bytes memory buffer = new bytes(2 * length + 2);
            buffer[0] = "0";
            buffer[1] = "x";
            for (uint256 i = 2 * length + 1; i > 1; --i) {
                buffer[i] = _SYMBOLS[value & 0xf];
                value >>= 4;
            }
            require(value == 0, "Strings: hex length insufficient");
            return string(buffer);
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Converts an `address` with fixed length of 20 bytes to its not checksummed ASCII `string` hexadecimal representation.
         */
        function toHexString(address addr) internal pure returns (string memory) {
            return toHexString(uint256(uint160(addr)), _ADDRESS_LENGTH);
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Returns true if the two strings are equal.
         */
        function equal(string memory a, string memory b) internal pure returns (bool) {
            return keccak256(bytes(a)) == keccak256(bytes(b));
        }
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
    // OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (utils/introspection/ERC165.sol)
    
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    import "./IERC165Upgradeable.sol";
    import "../../proxy/utils/Initializable.sol";
    
    /**
     * @dev Implementation of the {IERC165} interface.
     *
     * Contracts that want to implement ERC165 should inherit from this contract and override {supportsInterface} to check
     * for the additional interface id that will be supported. For example:
     *
     * ```solidity
     * function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
     *     return interfaceId == type(MyInterface).interfaceId || super.supportsInterface(interfaceId);
     * }
     * ```
     *
     * Alternatively, {ERC165Storage} provides an easier to use but more expensive implementation.
     */
    abstract contract ERC165Upgradeable is Initializable, IERC165Upgradeable {
        function __ERC165_init() internal onlyInitializing {
        }
    
        function __ERC165_init_unchained() internal onlyInitializing {
        }
        /**
         * @dev See {IERC165-supportsInterface}.
         */
        function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
            return interfaceId == type(IERC165Upgradeable).interfaceId;
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev This empty reserved space is put in place to allow future versions to add new
         * variables without shifting down storage in the inheritance chain.
         * See https://docs.openzeppelin.com/contracts/4.x/upgradeable#storage_gaps
         */
        uint256[50] private __gap;
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
    // OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (utils/introspection/IERC165.sol)
    
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /**
     * @dev Interface of the ERC165 standard, as defined in the
     * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165[EIP].
     *
     * Implementers can declare support of contract interfaces, which can then be
     * queried by others ({ERC165Checker}).
     *
     * For an implementation, see {ERC165}.
     */
    interface IERC165Upgradeable {
        /**
         * @dev Returns true if this contract implements the interface defined by
         * `interfaceId`. See the corresponding
         * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165#how-interfaces-are-identified[EIP section]
         * to learn more about how these ids are created.
         *
         * This function call must use less than 30 000 gas.
         */
        function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) external view returns (bool);
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
    // OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.9.0) (utils/math/Math.sol)
    
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /**
     * @dev Standard math utilities missing in the Solidity language.
     */
    library MathUpgradeable {
        enum Rounding {
            Down, // Toward negative infinity
            Up, // Toward infinity
            Zero // Toward zero
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Returns the largest of two numbers.
         */
        function max(uint256 a, uint256 b) internal pure returns (uint256) {
            return a > b ? a : b;
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Returns the smallest of two numbers.
         */
        function min(uint256 a, uint256 b) internal pure returns (uint256) {
            return a < b ? a : b;
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Returns the average of two numbers. The result is rounded towards
         * zero.
         */
        function average(uint256 a, uint256 b) internal pure returns (uint256) {
            // (a + b) / 2 can overflow.
            return (a & b) + (a ^ b) / 2;
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Returns the ceiling of the division of two numbers.
         *
         * This differs from standard division with `/` in that it rounds up instead
         * of rounding down.
         */
        function ceilDiv(uint256 a, uint256 b) internal pure returns (uint256) {
            // (a + b - 1) / b can overflow on addition, so we distribute.
            return a == 0 ? 0 : (a - 1) / b + 1;
        }
    
        /**
         * @notice Calculates floor(x * y / denominator) with full precision. Throws if result overflows a uint256 or denominator == 0
         * @dev Original credit to Remco Bloemen under MIT license (https://xn--2-umb.com/21/muldiv)
         * with further edits by Uniswap Labs also under MIT license.
         */
        function mulDiv(uint256 x, uint256 y, uint256 denominator) internal pure returns (uint256 result) {
            unchecked {
                // 512-bit multiply [prod1 prod0] = x * y. Compute the product mod 2^256 and mod 2^256 - 1, then use
                // use the Chinese Remainder Theorem to reconstruct the 512 bit result. The result is stored in two 256
                // variables such that product = prod1 * 2^256 + prod0.
                uint256 prod0; // Least significant 256 bits of the product
                uint256 prod1; // Most significant 256 bits of the product
                assembly {
                    let mm := mulmod(x, y, not(0))
                    prod0 := mul(x, y)
                    prod1 := sub(sub(mm, prod0), lt(mm, prod0))
                }
    
                // Handle non-overflow cases, 256 by 256 division.
                if (prod1 == 0) {
                    // Solidity will revert if denominator == 0, unlike the div opcode on its own.
                    // The surrounding unchecked block does not change this fact.
                    // See https://docs.soliditylang.org/en/latest/control-structures.html#checked-or-unchecked-arithmetic.
                    return prod0 / denominator;
                }
    
                // Make sure the result is less than 2^256. Also prevents denominator == 0.
                require(denominator > prod1, "Math: mulDiv overflow");
    
                ///////////////////////////////////////////////
                // 512 by 256 division.
                ///////////////////////////////////////////////
    
                // Make division exact by subtracting the remainder from [prod1 prod0].
                uint256 remainder;
                assembly {
                    // Compute remainder using mulmod.
                    remainder := mulmod(x, y, denominator)
    
                    // Subtract 256 bit number from 512 bit number.
                    prod1 := sub(prod1, gt(remainder, prod0))
                    prod0 := sub(prod0, remainder)
                }
    
                // Factor powers of two out of denominator and compute largest power of two divisor of denominator. Always >= 1.
                // See https://cs.stackexchange.com/q/138556/92363.
    
                // Does not overflow because the denominator cannot be zero at this stage in the function.
                uint256 twos = denominator & (~denominator + 1);
                assembly {
                    // Divide denominator by twos.
                    denominator := div(denominator, twos)
    
                    // Divide [prod1 prod0] by twos.
                    prod0 := div(prod0, twos)
    
                    // Flip twos such that it is 2^256 / twos. If twos is zero, then it becomes one.
                    twos := add(div(sub(0, twos), twos), 1)
                }
    
                // Shift in bits from prod1 into prod0.
                prod0 |= prod1 * twos;
    
                // Invert denominator mod 2^256. Now that denominator is an odd number, it has an inverse modulo 2^256 such
                // that denominator * inv = 1 mod 2^256. Compute the inverse by starting with a seed that is correct for
                // four bits. That is, denominator * inv = 1 mod 2^4.
                uint256 inverse = (3 * denominator) ^ 2;
    
                // Use the Newton-Raphson iteration to improve the precision. Thanks to Hensel's lifting lemma, this also works
                // in modular arithmetic, doubling the correct bits in each step.
                inverse *= 2 - denominator * inverse; // inverse mod 2^8
                inverse *= 2 - denominator * inverse; // inverse mod 2^16
                inverse *= 2 - denominator * inverse; // inverse mod 2^32
                inverse *= 2 - denominator * inverse; // inverse mod 2^64
                inverse *= 2 - denominator * inverse; // inverse mod 2^128
                inverse *= 2 - denominator * inverse; // inverse mod 2^256
    
                // Because the division is now exact we can divide by multiplying with the modular inverse of denominator.
                // This will give us the correct result modulo 2^256. Since the preconditions guarantee that the outcome is
                // less than 2^256, this is the final result. We don't need to compute the high bits of the result and prod1
                // is no longer required.
                result = prod0 * inverse;
                return result;
            }
        }
    
        /**
         * @notice Calculates x * y / denominator with full precision, following the selected rounding direction.
         */
        function mulDiv(uint256 x, uint256 y, uint256 denominator, Rounding rounding) internal pure returns (uint256) {
            uint256 result = mulDiv(x, y, denominator);
            if (rounding == Rounding.Up && mulmod(x, y, denominator) > 0) {
                result += 1;
            }
            return result;
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Returns the square root of a number. If the number is not a perfect square, the value is rounded down.
         *
         * Inspired by Henry S. Warren, Jr.'s "Hacker's Delight" (Chapter 11).
         */
        function sqrt(uint256 a) internal pure returns (uint256) {
            if (a == 0) {
                return 0;
            }
    
            // For our first guess, we get the biggest power of 2 which is smaller than the square root of the target.
            //
            // We know that the "msb" (most significant bit) of our target number `a` is a power of 2 such that we have
            // `msb(a) <= a < 2*msb(a)`. This value can be written `msb(a)=2**k` with `k=log2(a)`.
            //
            // This can be rewritten `2**log2(a) <= a < 2**(log2(a) + 1)`
            // → `sqrt(2**k) <= sqrt(a) < sqrt(2**(k+1))`
            // → `2**(k/2) <= sqrt(a) < 2**((k+1)/2) <= 2**(k/2 + 1)`
            //
            // Consequently, `2**(log2(a) / 2)` is a good first approximation of `sqrt(a)` with at least 1 correct bit.
            uint256 result = 1 << (log2(a) >> 1);
    
            // At this point `result` is an estimation with one bit of precision. We know the true value is a uint128,
            // since it is the square root of a uint256. Newton's method converges quadratically (precision doubles at
            // every iteration). We thus need at most 7 iteration to turn our partial result with one bit of precision
            // into the expected uint128 result.
            unchecked {
                result = (result + a / result) >> 1;
                result = (result + a / result) >> 1;
                result = (result + a / result) >> 1;
                result = (result + a / result) >> 1;
                result = (result + a / result) >> 1;
                result = (result + a / result) >> 1;
                result = (result + a / result) >> 1;
                return min(result, a / result);
            }
        }
    
        /**
         * @notice Calculates sqrt(a), following the selected rounding direction.
         */
        function sqrt(uint256 a, Rounding rounding) internal pure returns (uint256) {
            unchecked {
                uint256 result = sqrt(a);
                return result + (rounding == Rounding.Up && result * result < a ? 1 : 0);
            }
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Return the log in base 2, rounded down, of a positive value.
         * Returns 0 if given 0.
         */
        function log2(uint256 value) internal pure returns (uint256) {
            uint256 result = 0;
            unchecked {
                if (value >> 128 > 0) {
                    value >>= 128;
                    result += 128;
                }
                if (value >> 64 > 0) {
                    value >>= 64;
                    result += 64;
                }
                if (value >> 32 > 0) {
                    value >>= 32;
                    result += 32;
                }
                if (value >> 16 > 0) {
                    value >>= 16;
                    result += 16;
                }
                if (value >> 8 > 0) {
                    value >>= 8;
                    result += 8;
                }
                if (value >> 4 > 0) {
                    value >>= 4;
                    result += 4;
                }
                if (value >> 2 > 0) {
                    value >>= 2;
                    result += 2;
                }
                if (value >> 1 > 0) {
                    result += 1;
                }
            }
            return result;
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Return the log in base 2, following the selected rounding direction, of a positive value.
         * Returns 0 if given 0.
         */
        function log2(uint256 value, Rounding rounding) internal pure returns (uint256) {
            unchecked {
                uint256 result = log2(value);
                return result + (rounding == Rounding.Up && 1 << result < value ? 1 : 0);
            }
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Return the log in base 10, rounded down, of a positive value.
         * Returns 0 if given 0.
         */
        function log10(uint256 value) internal pure returns (uint256) {
            uint256 result = 0;
            unchecked {
                if (value >= 10 ** 64) {
                    value /= 10 ** 64;
                    result += 64;
                }
                if (value >= 10 ** 32) {
                    value /= 10 ** 32;
                    result += 32;
                }
                if (value >= 10 ** 16) {
                    value /= 10 ** 16;
                    result += 16;
                }
                if (value >= 10 ** 8) {
                    value /= 10 ** 8;
                    result += 8;
                }
                if (value >= 10 ** 4) {
                    value /= 10 ** 4;
                    result += 4;
                }
                if (value >= 10 ** 2) {
                    value /= 10 ** 2;
                    result += 2;
                }
                if (value >= 10 ** 1) {
                    result += 1;
                }
            }
            return result;
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Return the log in base 10, following the selected rounding direction, of a positive value.
         * Returns 0 if given 0.
         */
        function log10(uint256 value, Rounding rounding) internal pure returns (uint256) {
            unchecked {
                uint256 result = log10(value);
                return result + (rounding == Rounding.Up && 10 ** result < value ? 1 : 0);
            }
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Return the log in base 256, rounded down, of a positive value.
         * Returns 0 if given 0.
         *
         * Adding one to the result gives the number of pairs of hex symbols needed to represent `value` as a hex string.
         */
        function log256(uint256 value) internal pure returns (uint256) {
            uint256 result = 0;
            unchecked {
                if (value >> 128 > 0) {
                    value >>= 128;
                    result += 16;
                }
                if (value >> 64 > 0) {
                    value >>= 64;
                    result += 8;
                }
                if (value >> 32 > 0) {
                    value >>= 32;
                    result += 4;
                }
                if (value >> 16 > 0) {
                    value >>= 16;
                    result += 2;
                }
                if (value >> 8 > 0) {
                    result += 1;
                }
            }
            return result;
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Return the log in base 256, following the selected rounding direction, of a positive value.
         * Returns 0 if given 0.
         */
        function log256(uint256 value, Rounding rounding) internal pure returns (uint256) {
            unchecked {
                uint256 result = log256(value);
                return result + (rounding == Rounding.Up && 1 << (result << 3) < value ? 1 : 0);
            }
        }
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
    // OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.0) (utils/math/SignedMath.sol)
    
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /**
     * @dev Standard signed math utilities missing in the Solidity language.
     */
    library SignedMathUpgradeable {
        /**
         * @dev Returns the largest of two signed numbers.
         */
        function max(int256 a, int256 b) internal pure returns (int256) {
            return a > b ? a : b;
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Returns the smallest of two signed numbers.
         */
        function min(int256 a, int256 b) internal pure returns (int256) {
            return a < b ? a : b;
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Returns the average of two signed numbers without overflow.
         * The result is rounded towards zero.
         */
        function average(int256 a, int256 b) internal pure returns (int256) {
            // Formula from the book "Hacker's Delight"
            int256 x = (a & b) + ((a ^ b) >> 1);
            return x + (int256(uint256(x) >> 255) & (a ^ b));
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Returns the absolute unsigned value of a signed value.
         */
        function abs(int256 n) internal pure returns (uint256) {
            unchecked {
                // must be unchecked in order to support `n = type(int256).min`
                return uint256(n >= 0 ? n : -n);
            }
        }
    }

    Contract Name:
    DropERC721

    Contract Source Code:

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
    // ERC721A Contracts v3.3.0
    // Creator: Chiru Labs
    
    ////////// CHANGELOG: turn `approve` to virtual //////////
    
    pragma solidity ^0.8.4;
    
    import "erc721a-upgradeable/contracts/IERC721AUpgradeable.sol";
    import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/token/ERC721/IERC721ReceiverUpgradeable.sol";
    import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/utils/AddressUpgradeable.sol";
    import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/utils/ContextUpgradeable.sol";
    import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/utils/StringsUpgradeable.sol";
    import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/utils/introspection/ERC165Upgradeable.sol";
    import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/proxy/utils/Initializable.sol";
    
    /**
     * @dev Implementation of https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-721[ERC721] Non-Fungible Token Standard, including
     * the Metadata extension. Built to optimize for lower gas during batch mints.
     *
     * Assumes serials are sequentially minted starting at _startTokenId() (defaults to 0, e.g. 0, 1, 2, 3..).
     *
     * Assumes that an owner cannot have more than 2**64 - 1 (max value of uint64) of supply.
     *
     * Assumes that the maximum token id cannot exceed 2**256 - 1 (max value of uint256).
     */
    contract ERC721AUpgradeable is Initializable, ContextUpgradeable, ERC165Upgradeable, IERC721AUpgradeable {
        using AddressUpgradeable for address;
        using StringsUpgradeable for uint256;
    
        // The tokenId of the next token to be minted.
        uint256 internal _currentIndex;
    
        // The number of tokens burned.
        uint256 internal _burnCounter;
    
        // Token name
        string private _name;
    
        // Token symbol
        string private _symbol;
    
        // Mapping from token ID to ownership details
        // An empty struct value does not necessarily mean the token is unowned. See _ownershipOf implementation for details.
        mapping(uint256 => TokenOwnership) internal _ownerships;
    
        // Mapping owner address to address data
        mapping(address => AddressData) private _addressData;
    
        // Mapping from token ID to approved address
        mapping(uint256 => address) private _tokenApprovals;
    
        // Mapping from owner to operator approvals
        mapping(address => mapping(address => bool)) private _operatorApprovals;
    
        function __ERC721A_init(string memory name_, string memory symbol_) internal onlyInitializing {
            __ERC721A_init_unchained(name_, symbol_);
        }
    
        function __ERC721A_init_unchained(string memory name_, string memory symbol_) internal onlyInitializing {
            _name = name_;
            _symbol = symbol_;
            _currentIndex = _startTokenId();
        }
    
        /**
         * To change the starting tokenId, please override this function.
         */
        function _startTokenId() internal view virtual returns (uint256) {
            return 0;
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Burned tokens are calculated here, use _totalMinted() if you want to count just minted tokens.
         */
        function totalSupply() public view override returns (uint256) {
            // Counter underflow is impossible as _burnCounter cannot be incremented
            // more than _currentIndex - _startTokenId() times
            unchecked {
                return _currentIndex - _burnCounter - _startTokenId();
            }
        }
    
        /**
         * Returns the total amount of tokens minted in the contract.
         */
        function _totalMinted() internal view returns (uint256) {
            // Counter underflow is impossible as _currentIndex does not decrement,
            // and it is initialized to _startTokenId()
            unchecked {
                return _currentIndex - _startTokenId();
            }
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev See {IERC165-supportsInterface}.
         */
        function supportsInterface(
            bytes4 interfaceId
        ) public view virtual override(ERC165Upgradeable, IERC165Upgradeable) returns (bool) {
            return
                interfaceId == type(IERC721Upgradeable).interfaceId ||
                interfaceId == type(IERC721MetadataUpgradeable).interfaceId ||
                super.supportsInterface(interfaceId);
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev See {IERC721-balanceOf}.
         */
        function balanceOf(address owner) public view override returns (uint256) {
            if (owner == address(0)) revert BalanceQueryForZeroAddress();
            return uint256(_addressData[owner].balance);
        }
    
        /**
         * Returns the number of tokens minted by `owner`.
         */
        function _numberMinted(address owner) internal view returns (uint256) {
            return uint256(_addressData[owner].numberMinted);
        }
    
        /**
         * Returns the number of tokens burned by or on behalf of `owner`.
         */
        function _numberBurned(address owner) internal view returns (uint256) {
            return uint256(_addressData[owner].numberBurned);
        }
    
        /**
         * Returns the auxillary data for `owner`. (e.g. number of whitelist mint slots used).
         */
        function _getAux(address owner) internal view returns (uint64) {
            return _addressData[owner].aux;
        }
    
        /**
         * Sets the auxillary data for `owner`. (e.g. number of whitelist mint slots used).
         * If there are multiple variables, please pack them into a uint64.
         */
        function _setAux(address owner, uint64 aux) internal {
            _addressData[owner].aux = aux;
        }
    
        /**
         * Gas spent here starts off proportional to the maximum mint batch size.
         * It gradually moves to O(1) as tokens get transferred around in the collection over time.
         */
        function _ownershipOf(uint256 tokenId) internal view returns (TokenOwnership memory) {
            uint256 curr = tokenId;
    
            unchecked {
                if (_startTokenId() <= curr)
                    if (curr < _currentIndex) {
                        TokenOwnership memory ownership = _ownerships[curr];
                        if (!ownership.burned) {
                            if (ownership.addr != address(0)) {
                                return ownership;
                            }
                            // Invariant:
                            // There will always be an ownership that has an address and is not burned
                            // before an ownership that does not have an address and is not burned.
                            // Hence, curr will not underflow.
                            while (true) {
                                curr--;
                                ownership = _ownerships[curr];
                                if (ownership.addr != address(0)) {
                                    return ownership;
                                }
                            }
                        }
                    }
            }
            revert OwnerQueryForNonexistentToken();
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev See {IERC721-ownerOf}.
         */
        function ownerOf(uint256 tokenId) public view override returns (address) {
            return _ownershipOf(tokenId).addr;
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev See {IERC721Metadata-name}.
         */
        function name() public view virtual override returns (string memory) {
            return _name;
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev See {IERC721Metadata-symbol}.
         */
        function symbol() public view virtual override returns (string memory) {
            return _symbol;
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev See {IERC721Metadata-tokenURI}.
         */
        function tokenURI(uint256 tokenId) public view virtual override returns (string memory) {
            if (!_exists(tokenId)) revert URIQueryForNonexistentToken();
    
            string memory baseURI = _baseURI();
            return bytes(baseURI).length != 0 ? string(abi.encodePacked(baseURI, tokenId.toString())) : "";
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Base URI for computing {tokenURI}. If set, the resulting URI for each
         * token will be the concatenation of the `baseURI` and the `tokenId`. Empty
         * by default, can be overriden in child contracts.
         */
        function _baseURI() internal view virtual returns (string memory) {
            return "";
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev See {IERC721-approve}.
         */
        function approve(address to, uint256 tokenId) public virtual override {
            address owner = ERC721AUpgradeable.ownerOf(tokenId);
            if (to == owner) revert ApprovalToCurrentOwner();
    
            if (_msgSender() != owner)
                if (!isApprovedForAll(owner, _msgSender())) {
                    revert ApprovalCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();
                }
    
            _approve(to, tokenId, owner);
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev See {IERC721-getApproved}.
         */
        function getApproved(uint256 tokenId) public view override returns (address) {
            if (!_exists(tokenId)) revert ApprovalQueryForNonexistentToken();
    
            return _tokenApprovals[tokenId];
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev See {IERC721-setApprovalForAll}.
         */
        function setApprovalForAll(address operator, bool approved) public virtual override {
            if (operator == _msgSender()) revert ApproveToCaller();
    
            _operatorApprovals[_msgSender()][operator] = approved;
            emit ApprovalForAll(_msgSender(), operator, approved);
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev See {IERC721-isApprovedForAll}.
         */
        function isApprovedForAll(address owner, address operator) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
            return _operatorApprovals[owner][operator];
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev See {IERC721-transferFrom}.
         */
        function transferFrom(address from, address to, uint256 tokenId) public virtual override {
            _transfer(from, to, tokenId);
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev See {IERC721-safeTransferFrom}.
         */
        function safeTransferFrom(address from, address to, uint256 tokenId) public virtual override {
            safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId, "");
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev See {IERC721-safeTransferFrom}.
         */
        function safeTransferFrom(address from, address to, uint256 tokenId, bytes memory _data) public virtual override {
            _transfer(from, to, tokenId);
            if (to.isContract())
                if (!_checkContractOnERC721Received(from, to, tokenId, _data)) {
                    revert TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer();
                }
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Returns whether `tokenId` exists.
         *
         * Tokens can be managed by their owner or approved accounts via {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
         *
         * Tokens start existing when they are minted (`_mint`),
         */
        function _exists(uint256 tokenId) internal view returns (bool) {
            return _startTokenId() <= tokenId && tokenId < _currentIndex && !_ownerships[tokenId].burned;
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Equivalent to `_safeMint(to, quantity, '')`.
         */
        function _safeMint(address to, uint256 quantity) internal {
            _safeMint(to, quantity, "");
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Safely mints `quantity` tokens and transfers them to `to`.
         *
         * Requirements:
         *
         * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement
         *   {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received}, which is called for each safe transfer.
         * - `quantity` must be greater than 0.
         *
         * Emits a {Transfer} event.
         */
        function _safeMint(address to, uint256 quantity, bytes memory _data) internal {
            uint256 startTokenId = _currentIndex;
            if (to == address(0)) revert MintToZeroAddress();
            if (quantity == 0) revert MintZeroQuantity();
    
            _beforeTokenTransfers(address(0), to, startTokenId, quantity);
    
            // Overflows are incredibly unrealistic.
            // balance or numberMinted overflow if current value of either + quantity > 1.8e19 (2**64) - 1
            // updatedIndex overflows if _currentIndex + quantity > 1.2e77 (2**256) - 1
            unchecked {
                _addressData[to].balance += uint64(quantity);
                _addressData[to].numberMinted += uint64(quantity);
    
                _ownerships[startTokenId].addr = to;
                _ownerships[startTokenId].startTimestamp = uint64(block.timestamp);
    
                uint256 updatedIndex = startTokenId;
                uint256 end = updatedIndex + quantity;
    
                if (to.isContract()) {
                    do {
                        emit Transfer(address(0), to, updatedIndex);
                        if (!_checkContractOnERC721Received(address(0), to, updatedIndex++, _data)) {
                            revert TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer();
                        }
                    } while (updatedIndex < end);
                    // Reentrancy protection
                    if (_currentIndex != startTokenId) revert();
                } else {
                    do {
                        emit Transfer(address(0), to, updatedIndex++);
                    } while (updatedIndex < end);
                }
                _currentIndex = updatedIndex;
            }
            _afterTokenTransfers(address(0), to, startTokenId, quantity);
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Mints `quantity` tokens and transfers them to `to`.
         *
         * Requirements:
         *
         * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
         * - `quantity` must be greater than 0.
         *
         * Emits a {Transfer} event.
         */
        function _mint(address to, uint256 quantity) internal {
            uint256 startTokenId = _currentIndex;
            if (to == address(0)) revert MintToZeroAddress();
            if (quantity == 0) revert MintZeroQuantity();
    
            _beforeTokenTransfers(address(0), to, startTokenId, quantity);
    
            // Overflows are incredibly unrealistic.
            // balance or numberMinted overflow if current value of either + quantity > 1.8e19 (2**64) - 1
            // updatedIndex overflows if _currentIndex + quantity > 1.2e77 (2**256) - 1
            unchecked {
                _addressData[to].balance += uint64(quantity);
                _addressData[to].numberMinted += uint64(quantity);
    
                _ownerships[startTokenId].addr = to;
                _ownerships[startTokenId].startTimestamp = uint64(block.timestamp);
    
                uint256 updatedIndex = startTokenId;
                uint256 end = updatedIndex + quantity;
    
                do {
                    emit Transfer(address(0), to, updatedIndex++);
                } while (updatedIndex < end);
    
                _currentIndex = updatedIndex;
            }
            _afterTokenTransfers(address(0), to, startTokenId, quantity);
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Transfers `tokenId` from `from` to `to`.
         *
         * Requirements:
         *
         * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
         * - `tokenId` token must be owned by `from`.
         *
         * Emits a {Transfer} event.
         */
        function _transfer(address from, address to, uint256 tokenId) private {
            TokenOwnership memory prevOwnership = _ownershipOf(tokenId);
    
            if (prevOwnership.addr != from) revert TransferFromIncorrectOwner();
    
            bool isApprovedOrOwner = (_msgSender() == from ||
                isApprovedForAll(from, _msgSender()) ||
                getApproved(tokenId) == _msgSender());
    
            if (!isApprovedOrOwner) revert TransferCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();
            if (to == address(0)) revert TransferToZeroAddress();
    
            _beforeTokenTransfers(from, to, tokenId, 1);
    
            // Clear approvals from the previous owner
            _approve(address(0), tokenId, from);
    
            // Underflow of the sender's balance is impossible because we check for
            // ownership above and the recipient's balance can't realistically overflow.
            // Counter overflow is incredibly unrealistic as tokenId would have to be 2**256.
            unchecked {
                _addressData[from].balance -= 1;
                _addressData[to].balance += 1;
    
                TokenOwnership storage currSlot = _ownerships[tokenId];
                currSlot.addr = to;
                currSlot.startTimestamp = uint64(block.timestamp);
    
                // If the ownership slot of tokenId+1 is not explicitly set, that means the transfer initiator owns it.
                // Set the slot of tokenId+1 explicitly in storage to maintain correctness for ownerOf(tokenId+1) calls.
                uint256 nextTokenId = tokenId + 1;
                TokenOwnership storage nextSlot = _ownerships[nextTokenId];
                if (nextSlot.addr == address(0)) {
                    // This will suffice for checking _exists(nextTokenId),
                    // as a burned slot cannot contain the zero address.
                    if (nextTokenId != _currentIndex) {
                        nextSlot.addr = from;
                        nextSlot.startTimestamp = prevOwnership.startTimestamp;
                    }
                }
            }
    
            emit Transfer(from, to, tokenId);
            _afterTokenTransfers(from, to, tokenId, 1);
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Equivalent to `_burn(tokenId, false)`.
         */
        function _burn(uint256 tokenId) internal virtual {
            _burn(tokenId, false);
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Destroys `tokenId`.
         * The approval is cleared when the token is burned.
         *
         * Requirements:
         *
         * - `tokenId` must exist.
         *
         * Emits a {Transfer} event.
         */
        function _burn(uint256 tokenId, bool approvalCheck) internal virtual {
            TokenOwnership memory prevOwnership = _ownershipOf(tokenId);
    
            address from = prevOwnership.addr;
    
            if (approvalCheck) {
                bool isApprovedOrOwner = (_msgSender() == from ||
                    isApprovedForAll(from, _msgSender()) ||
                    getApproved(tokenId) == _msgSender());
    
                if (!isApprovedOrOwner) revert TransferCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();
            }
    
            _beforeTokenTransfers(from, address(0), tokenId, 1);
    
            // Clear approvals from the previous owner
            _approve(address(0), tokenId, from);
    
            // Underflow of the sender's balance is impossible because we check for
            // ownership above and the recipient's balance can't realistically overflow.
            // Counter overflow is incredibly unrealistic as tokenId would have to be 2**256.
            unchecked {
                AddressData storage addressData = _addressData[from];
                addressData.balance -= 1;
                addressData.numberBurned += 1;
    
                // Keep track of who burned the token, and the timestamp of burning.
                TokenOwnership storage currSlot = _ownerships[tokenId];
                currSlot.addr = from;
                currSlot.startTimestamp = uint64(block.timestamp);
                currSlot.burned = true;
    
                // If the ownership slot of tokenId+1 is not explicitly set, that means the burn initiator owns it.
                // Set the slot of tokenId+1 explicitly in storage to maintain correctness for ownerOf(tokenId+1) calls.
                uint256 nextTokenId = tokenId + 1;
                TokenOwnership storage nextSlot = _ownerships[nextTokenId];
                if (nextSlot.addr == address(0)) {
                    // This will suffice for checking _exists(nextTokenId),
                    // as a burned slot cannot contain the zero address.
                    if (nextTokenId != _currentIndex) {
                        nextSlot.addr = from;
                        nextSlot.startTimestamp = prevOwnership.startTimestamp;
                    }
                }
            }
    
            emit Transfer(from, address(0), tokenId);
            _afterTokenTransfers(from, address(0), tokenId, 1);
    
            // Overflow not possible, as _burnCounter cannot be exceed _currentIndex times.
            unchecked {
                _burnCounter++;
            }
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Approve `to` to operate on `tokenId`
         *
         * Emits a {Approval} event.
         */
        function _approve(address to, uint256 tokenId, address owner) private {
            _tokenApprovals[tokenId] = to;
            emit Approval(owner, to, tokenId);
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Internal function to invoke {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received} on a target contract.
         *
         * @param from address representing the previous owner of the given token ID
         * @param to target address that will receive the tokens
         * @param tokenId uint256 ID of the token to be transferred
         * @param _data bytes optional data to send along with the call
         * @return bool whether the call correctly returned the expected magic value
         */
        function _checkContractOnERC721Received(
            address from,
            address to,
            uint256 tokenId,
            bytes memory _data
        ) private returns (bool) {
            try IERC721ReceiverUpgradeable(to).onERC721Received(_msgSender(), from, tokenId, _data) returns (
                bytes4 retval
            ) {
                return retval == IERC721ReceiverUpgradeable(to).onERC721Received.selector;
            } catch (bytes memory reason) {
                if (reason.length == 0) {
                    revert TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer();
                } else {
                    assembly {
                        revert(add(32, reason), mload(reason))
                    }
                }
            }
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Hook that is called before a set of serially-ordered token ids are about to be transferred. This includes minting.
         * And also called before burning one token.
         *
         * startTokenId - the first token id to be transferred
         * quantity - the amount to be transferred
         *
         * Calling conditions:
         *
         * - When `from` and `to` are both non-zero, `from`'s `tokenId` will be
         * transferred to `to`.
         * - When `from` is zero, `tokenId` will be minted for `to`.
         * - When `to` is zero, `tokenId` will be burned by `from`.
         * - `from` and `to` are never both zero.
         */
        function _beforeTokenTransfers(address from, address to, uint256 startTokenId, uint256 quantity) internal virtual {}
    
        /**
         * @dev Hook that is called after a set of serially-ordered token ids have been transferred. This includes
         * minting.
         * And also called after one token has been burned.
         *
         * startTokenId - the first token id to be transferred
         * quantity - the amount to be transferred
         *
         * Calling conditions:
         *
         * - When `from` and `to` are both non-zero, `from`'s `tokenId` has been
         * transferred to `to`.
         * - When `from` is zero, `tokenId` has been minted for `to`.
         * - When `to` is zero, `tokenId` has been burned by `from`.
         * - `from` and `to` are never both zero.
         */
        function _afterTokenTransfers(address from, address to, uint256 startTokenId, uint256 quantity) internal virtual {}
    
        /**
         * @dev This empty reserved space is put in place to allow future versions to add new
         * variables without shifting down storage in the inheritance chain.
         * See https://docs.openzeppelin.com/contracts/4.x/upgradeable#storage_gaps
         */
        uint256[42] private __gap;
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
    // OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (utils/introspection/IERC165.sol)
    
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /**
     * @dev Interface of the ERC165 standard, as defined in the
     * [EIP](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165).
     *
     * Implementers can declare support of contract interfaces, which can then be
     * queried by others ({ERC165Checker}).
     *
     * For an implementation, see {ERC165}.
     */
    interface IERC165 {
        /**
         * @dev Returns true if this contract implements the interface defined by
         * `interfaceId`. See the corresponding
         * [EIP section](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165#how-interfaces-are-identified)
         * to learn more about how these ids are created.
         *
         * This function call must use less than 30 000 gas.
         */
        function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) external view returns (bool);
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /**
     * @title ERC20 interface
     * @dev see https://github.com/ethereum/EIPs/issues/20
     */
    interface IERC20 {
        function totalSupply() external view returns (uint256);
    
        function balanceOf(address who) external view returns (uint256);
    
        function allowance(address owner, address spender) external view returns (uint256);
    
        function transfer(address to, uint256 value) external returns (bool);
    
        function approve(address spender, uint256 value) external returns (bool);
    
        function transferFrom(address from, address to, uint256 value) external returns (bool);
    
        event Transfer(address indexed from, address indexed to, uint256 value);
    
        event Approval(address indexed owner, address indexed spender, uint256 value);
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache 2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    import "./IERC165.sol";
    
    /**
     * @dev Interface for the NFT Royalty Standard.
     *
     * A standardized way to retrieve royalty payment information for non-fungible tokens (NFTs) to enable universal
     * support for royalty payments across all NFT marketplaces and ecosystem participants.
     *
     * _Available since v4.5._
     */
    interface IERC2981 is IERC165 {
        /**
         * @dev Returns how much royalty is owed and to whom, based on a sale price that may be denominated in any unit of
         * exchange. The royalty amount is denominated and should be payed in that same unit of exchange.
         */
        function royaltyInfo(
            uint256 tokenId,
            uint256 salePrice
        ) external view returns (address receiver, uint256 royaltyAmount);
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /// @author thirdweb
    
    /**
     *  @title   Batch-mint Metadata
     *  @notice  The `BatchMintMetadata` is a contract extension for any base NFT contract. It lets the smart contract
     *           using this extension set metadata for `n` number of NFTs all at once. This is enabled by storing a single
     *           base URI for a batch of `n` NFTs, where the metadata for each NFT in a relevant batch is `baseURI/tokenId`.
     */
    
    contract BatchMintMetadata {
        /// @dev Invalid index for batch
        error BatchMintInvalidBatchId(uint256 index);
    
        /// @dev Invalid token
        error BatchMintInvalidTokenId(uint256 tokenId);
    
        /// @dev Metadata frozen
        error BatchMintMetadataFrozen(uint256 batchId);
    
        /// @dev Largest tokenId of each batch of tokens with the same baseURI + 1 {ex: batchId 100 at position 0 includes tokens 0-99}
        uint256[] private batchIds;
    
        /// @dev Mapping from id of a batch of tokens => to base URI for the respective batch of tokens.
        mapping(uint256 => string) private baseURI;
    
        /// @dev Mapping from id of a batch of tokens => to whether the base URI for the respective batch of tokens is frozen.
        mapping(uint256 => bool) public batchFrozen;
    
        /// @dev This event emits when the metadata of all tokens are frozen.
        /// While not currently supported by marketplaces, this event allows
        /// future indexing if desired.
        event MetadataFrozen();
    
        // @dev This event emits when the metadata of a range of tokens is updated.
        /// So that the third-party platforms such as NFT market could
        /// timely update the images and related attributes of the NFTs.
        event BatchMetadataUpdate(uint256 _fromTokenId, uint256 _toTokenId);
    
        /**
         *  @notice         Returns the count of batches of NFTs.
         *  @dev            Each batch of tokens has an in ID and an associated `baseURI`.
         *                  See {batchIds}.
         */
        function getBaseURICount() public view returns (uint256) {
            return batchIds.length;
        }
    
        /**
         *  @notice         Returns the ID for the batch of tokens at the given index.
         *  @dev            See {getBaseURICount}.
         *  @param _index   Index of the desired batch in batchIds array.
         */
        function getBatchIdAtIndex(uint256 _index) public view returns (uint256) {
            if (_index >= getBaseURICount()) {
                revert BatchMintInvalidBatchId(_index);
            }
            return batchIds[_index];
        }
    
        /// @dev Returns the id for the batch of tokens the given tokenId belongs to.
        function _getBatchId(uint256 _tokenId) internal view returns (uint256 batchId, uint256 index) {
            uint256 numOfTokenBatches = getBaseURICount();
            uint256[] memory indices = batchIds;
    
            for (uint256 i = 0; i < numOfTokenBatches; i += 1) {
                if (_tokenId < indices[i]) {
                    index = i;
                    batchId = indices[i];
    
                    return (batchId, index);
                }
            }
    
            revert BatchMintInvalidTokenId(_tokenId);
        }
    
        /// @dev Returns the baseURI for a token. The intended metadata URI for the token is baseURI + tokenId.
        function _getBaseURI(uint256 _tokenId) internal view returns (string memory) {
            uint256 numOfTokenBatches = getBaseURICount();
            uint256[] memory indices = batchIds;
    
            for (uint256 i = 0; i < numOfTokenBatches; i += 1) {
                if (_tokenId < indices[i]) {
                    return baseURI[indices[i]];
                }
            }
    
            revert BatchMintInvalidTokenId(_tokenId);
        }
    
        /// @dev returns the starting tokenId of a given batchId.
        function _getBatchStartId(uint256 _batchID) internal view returns (uint256) {
            uint256 numOfTokenBatches = getBaseURICount();
            uint256[] memory indices = batchIds;
    
            for (uint256 i = 0; i < numOfTokenBatches; i++) {
                if (_batchID == indices[i]) {
                    if (i > 0) {
                        return indices[i - 1];
                    }
                    return 0;
                }
            }
    
            revert BatchMintInvalidBatchId(_batchID);
        }
    
        /// @dev Sets the base URI for the batch of tokens with the given batchId.
        function _setBaseURI(uint256 _batchId, string memory _baseURI) internal {
            if (batchFrozen[_batchId]) {
                revert BatchMintMetadataFrozen(_batchId);
            }
            baseURI[_batchId] = _baseURI;
            emit BatchMetadataUpdate(_getBatchStartId(_batchId), _batchId);
        }
    
        /// @dev Freezes the base URI for the batch of tokens with the given batchId.
        function _freezeBaseURI(uint256 _batchId) internal {
            string memory baseURIForBatch = baseURI[_batchId];
            if (bytes(baseURIForBatch).length == 0) {
                revert BatchMintInvalidBatchId(_batchId);
            }
            batchFrozen[_batchId] = true;
            emit MetadataFrozen();
        }
    
        /// @dev Mints a batch of tokenIds and associates a common baseURI to all those Ids.
        function _batchMintMetadata(
            uint256 _startId,
            uint256 _amountToMint,
            string memory _baseURIForTokens
        ) internal returns (uint256 nextTokenIdToMint, uint256 batchId) {
            batchId = _startId + _amountToMint;
            nextTokenIdToMint = batchId;
    
            batchIds.push(batchId);
    
            baseURI[batchId] = _baseURIForTokens;
        }
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /// @author thirdweb
    
    import "./interface/IContractMetadata.sol";
    
    /**
     *  @title   Contract Metadata
     *  @notice  Thirdweb's `ContractMetadata` is a contract extension for any base contracts. It lets you set a metadata URI
     *           for you contract.
     *           Additionally, `ContractMetadata` is necessary for NFT contracts that want royalties to get distributed on OpenSea.
     */
    
    abstract contract ContractMetadata is IContractMetadata {
        /// @dev The sender is not authorized to perform the action
        error ContractMetadataUnauthorized();
    
        /// @notice Returns the contract metadata URI.
        string public override contractURI;
    
        /**
         *  @notice         Lets a contract admin set the URI for contract-level metadata.
         *  @dev            Caller should be authorized to setup contractURI, e.g. contract admin.
         *                  See {_canSetContractURI}.
         *                  Emits {ContractURIUpdated Event}.
         *
         *  @param _uri     keccak256 hash of the role. e.g. keccak256("TRANSFER_ROLE")
         */
        function setContractURI(string memory _uri) external override {
            if (!_canSetContractURI()) {
                revert ContractMetadataUnauthorized();
            }
    
            _setupContractURI(_uri);
        }
    
        /// @dev Lets a contract admin set the URI for contract-level metadata.
        function _setupContractURI(string memory _uri) internal {
            string memory prevURI = contractURI;
            contractURI = _uri;
    
            emit ContractURIUpdated(prevURI, _uri);
        }
    
        /// @dev Returns whether contract metadata can be set in the given execution context.
        function _canSetContractURI() internal view virtual returns (bool);
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /// @author thirdweb
    
    import "./interface/IDelayedReveal.sol";
    
    /**
     *  @title   Delayed Reveal
     *  @notice  Thirdweb's `DelayedReveal` is a contract extension for base NFT contracts. It lets you create batches of
     *           'delayed-reveal' NFTs. You can learn more about the usage of delayed reveal NFTs here - https://blog.thirdweb.com/delayed-reveal-nfts
     */
    
    abstract contract DelayedReveal is IDelayedReveal {
        /// @dev The contract doesn't have any url to be delayed revealed
        error DelayedRevealNothingToReveal();
    
        /// @dev The result of the returned an incorrect hash
        error DelayedRevealIncorrectResultHash(bytes32 expected, bytes32 actual);
    
        /// @dev Mapping from tokenId of a batch of tokens => to delayed reveal data.
        mapping(uint256 => bytes) public encryptedData;
    
        /// @dev Sets the delayed reveal data for a batchId.
        function _setEncryptedData(uint256 _batchId, bytes memory _encryptedData) internal {
            encryptedData[_batchId] = _encryptedData;
        }
    
        /**
         *  @notice             Returns revealed URI for a batch of NFTs.
         *  @dev                Reveal encrypted base URI for `_batchId` with caller/admin's `_key` used for encryption.
         *                      Reverts if there's no encrypted URI for `_batchId`.
         *                      See {encryptDecrypt}.
         *
         *  @param _batchId     ID of the batch for which URI is being revealed.
         *  @param _key         Secure key used by caller/admin for encryption of baseURI.
         *
         *  @return revealedURI Decrypted base URI.
         */
        function getRevealURI(uint256 _batchId, bytes calldata _key) public view returns (string memory revealedURI) {
            bytes memory data = encryptedData[_batchId];
            if (data.length == 0) {
                revert DelayedRevealNothingToReveal();
            }
    
            (bytes memory encryptedURI, bytes32 provenanceHash) = abi.decode(data, (bytes, bytes32));
    
            revealedURI = string(encryptDecrypt(encryptedURI, _key));
    
            if (keccak256(abi.encodePacked(revealedURI, _key, block.chainid)) != provenanceHash) {
                revert DelayedRevealIncorrectResultHash(
                    provenanceHash,
                    keccak256(abi.encodePacked(revealedURI, _key, block.chainid))
                );
            }
        }
    
        /**
         *  @notice         Encrypt/decrypt data on chain.
         *  @dev            Encrypt/decrypt given `data` with `key`. Uses inline assembly.
         *                  See: https://ethereum.stackexchange.com/questions/69825/decrypt-message-on-chain
         *
         *  @param data     Bytes of data to encrypt/decrypt.
         *  @param key      Secure key used by caller for encryption/decryption.
         *
         *  @return result  Output after encryption/decryption of given data.
         */
        function encryptDecrypt(bytes memory data, bytes calldata key) public pure override returns (bytes memory result) {
            // Store data length on stack for later use
            uint256 length = data.length;
    
            // solhint-disable-next-line no-inline-assembly
            assembly {
                // Set result to free memory pointer
                result := mload(0x40)
                // Increase free memory pointer by lenght + 32
                mstore(0x40, add(add(result, length), 32))
                // Set result length
                mstore(result, length)
            }
    
            // Iterate over the data stepping by 32 bytes
            for (uint256 i = 0; i < length; i += 32) {
                // Generate hash of the key and offset
                bytes32 hash = keccak256(abi.encodePacked(key, i));
    
                bytes32 chunk;
                // solhint-disable-next-line no-inline-assembly
                assembly {
                    // Read 32-bytes data chunk
                    chunk := mload(add(data, add(i, 32)))
                }
                // XOR the chunk with hash
                chunk ^= hash;
                // solhint-disable-next-line no-inline-assembly
                assembly {
                    // Write 32-byte encrypted chunk
                    mstore(add(result, add(i, 32)), chunk)
                }
            }
        }
    
        /**
         *  @notice         Returns whether the relvant batch of NFTs is subject to a delayed reveal.
         *  @dev            Returns `true` if `_batchId`'s base URI is encrypted.
         *  @param _batchId ID of a batch of NFTs.
         */
        function isEncryptedBatch(uint256 _batchId) public view returns (bool) {
            return encryptedData[_batchId].length > 0;
        }
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /// @author thirdweb
    
    import "./interface/IDrop.sol";
    import "../lib/MerkleProof.sol";
    
    abstract contract Drop is IDrop {
        /// @dev The sender is not authorized to perform the action
        error DropUnauthorized();
    
        /// @dev Exceeded the max token total supply
        error DropExceedMaxSupply();
    
        /// @dev No active claim condition
        error DropNoActiveCondition();
    
        /// @dev Claim condition invalid currency or price
        error DropClaimInvalidTokenPrice(
            address expectedCurrency,
            uint256 expectedPricePerToken,
            address actualCurrency,
            uint256 actualExpectedPricePerToken
        );
    
        /// @dev Claim condition exceeded limit
        error DropClaimExceedLimit(uint256 expected, uint256 actual);
    
        /// @dev Claim condition exceeded max supply
        error DropClaimExceedMaxSupply(uint256 expected, uint256 actual);
    
        /// @dev Claim condition not started yet
        error DropClaimNotStarted(uint256 expected, uint256 actual);
    
        /*///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
                                State variables
        //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////*/
    
        /// @dev The active conditions for claiming tokens.
        ClaimConditionList public claimCondition;
    
        /*///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
                                Drop logic
        //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////*/
    
        /// @dev Lets an account claim tokens.
        function claim(
            address _receiver,
            uint256 _quantity,
            address _currency,
            uint256 _pricePerToken,
            AllowlistProof calldata _allowlistProof,
            bytes memory _data
        ) public payable virtual override {
            _beforeClaim(_receiver, _quantity, _currency, _pricePerToken, _allowlistProof, _data);
    
            uint256 activeConditionId = getActiveClaimConditionId();
    
            verifyClaim(activeConditionId, _dropMsgSender(), _quantity, _currency, _pricePerToken, _allowlistProof);
    
            // Update contract state.
            claimCondition.conditions[activeConditionId].supplyClaimed += _quantity;
            claimCondition.supplyClaimedByWallet[activeConditionId][_dropMsgSender()] += _quantity;
    
            // If there's a price, collect price.
            _collectPriceOnClaim(address(0), _quantity, _currency, _pricePerToken);
    
            // Mint the relevant tokens to claimer.
            uint256 startTokenId = _transferTokensOnClaim(_receiver, _quantity);
    
            emit TokensClaimed(activeConditionId, _dropMsgSender(), _receiver, startTokenId, _quantity);
    
            _afterClaim(_receiver, _quantity, _currency, _pricePerToken, _allowlistProof, _data);
        }
    
        /// @dev Lets a contract admin set claim conditions.
        function setClaimConditions(
            ClaimCondition[] calldata _conditions,
            bool _resetClaimEligibility
        ) external virtual override {
            if (!_canSetClaimConditions()) {
                revert DropUnauthorized();
            }
    
            uint256 existingStartIndex = claimCondition.currentStartId;
            uint256 existingPhaseCount = claimCondition.count;
    
            /**
             *  The mapping `supplyClaimedByWallet` uses a claim condition's UID as a key.
             *
             *  If `_resetClaimEligibility == true`, we assign completely new UIDs to the claim
             *  conditions in `_conditions`, effectively resetting the restrictions on claims expressed
             *  by `supplyClaimedByWallet`.
             */
            uint256 newStartIndex = existingStartIndex;
            if (_resetClaimEligibility) {
                newStartIndex = existingStartIndex + existingPhaseCount;
            }
    
            claimCondition.count = _conditions.length;
            claimCondition.currentStartId = newStartIndex;
    
            uint256 lastConditionStartTimestamp;
            for (uint256 i = 0; i < _conditions.length; i++) {
                require(i == 0 || lastConditionStartTimestamp < _conditions[i].startTimestamp, "ST");
    
                uint256 supplyClaimedAlready = claimCondition.conditions[newStartIndex + i].supplyClaimed;
                if (supplyClaimedAlready > _conditions[i].maxClaimableSupply) {
                    revert DropExceedMaxSupply();
                }
    
                claimCondition.conditions[newStartIndex + i] = _conditions[i];
                claimCondition.conditions[newStartIndex + i].supplyClaimed = supplyClaimedAlready;
    
                lastConditionStartTimestamp = _conditions[i].startTimestamp;
            }
    
            /**
             *  Gas refunds (as much as possible)
             *
             *  If `_resetClaimEligibility == true`, we assign completely new UIDs to the claim
             *  conditions in `_conditions`. So, we delete claim conditions with UID < `newStartIndex`.
             *
             *  If `_resetClaimEligibility == false`, and there are more existing claim conditions
             *  than in `_conditions`, we delete the existing claim conditions that don't get replaced
             *  by the conditions in `_conditions`.
             */
            if (_resetClaimEligibility) {
                for (uint256 i = existingStartIndex; i < newStartIndex; i++) {
                    delete claimCondition.conditions[i];
                }
            } else {
                if (existingPhaseCount > _conditions.length) {
                    for (uint256 i = _conditions.length; i < existingPhaseCount; i++) {
                        delete claimCondition.conditions[newStartIndex + i];
                    }
                }
            }
    
            emit ClaimConditionsUpdated(_conditions, _resetClaimEligibility);
        }
    
        /// @dev Checks a request to claim NFTs against the active claim condition's criteria.
        function verifyClaim(
            uint256 _conditionId,
            address _claimer,
            uint256 _quantity,
            address _currency,
            uint256 _pricePerToken,
            AllowlistProof calldata _allowlistProof
        ) public view virtual returns (bool isOverride) {
            ClaimCondition memory currentClaimPhase = claimCondition.conditions[_conditionId];
            uint256 claimLimit = currentClaimPhase.quantityLimitPerWallet;
            uint256 claimPrice = currentClaimPhase.pricePerToken;
            address claimCurrency = currentClaimPhase.currency;
    
            /*
             * Here `isOverride` implies that if the merkle proof verification fails,
             * the claimer would claim through open claim limit instead of allowlisted limit.
             */
            if (currentClaimPhase.merkleRoot != bytes32(0)) {
                (isOverride, ) = MerkleProof.verify(
                    _allowlistProof.proof,
                    currentClaimPhase.merkleRoot,
                    keccak256(
                        abi.encodePacked(
                            _claimer,
                            _allowlistProof.quantityLimitPerWallet,
                            _allowlistProof.pricePerToken,
                            _allowlistProof.currency
                        )
                    )
                );
            }
    
            if (isOverride) {
                claimLimit = _allowlistProof.quantityLimitPerWallet != 0
                    ? _allowlistProof.quantityLimitPerWallet
                    : claimLimit;
                claimPrice = _allowlistProof.pricePerToken != type(uint256).max
                    ? _allowlistProof.pricePerToken
                    : claimPrice;
                claimCurrency = _allowlistProof.pricePerToken != type(uint256).max && _allowlistProof.currency != address(0)
                    ? _allowlistProof.currency
                    : claimCurrency;
            }
    
            uint256 supplyClaimedByWallet = claimCondition.supplyClaimedByWallet[_conditionId][_claimer];
    
            if (_currency != claimCurrency || _pricePerToken != claimPrice) {
                revert DropClaimInvalidTokenPrice(_currency, _pricePerToken, claimCurrency, claimPrice);
            }
    
            if (_quantity == 0 || (_quantity + supplyClaimedByWallet > claimLimit)) {
                revert DropClaimExceedLimit(claimLimit, _quantity + supplyClaimedByWallet);
            }
    
            if (currentClaimPhase.supplyClaimed + _quantity > currentClaimPhase.maxClaimableSupply) {
                revert DropClaimExceedMaxSupply(
                    currentClaimPhase.maxClaimableSupply,
                    currentClaimPhase.supplyClaimed + _quantity
                );
            }
    
            if (currentClaimPhase.startTimestamp > block.timestamp) {
                revert DropClaimNotStarted(currentClaimPhase.startTimestamp, block.timestamp);
            }
        }
    
        /// @dev At any given moment, returns the uid for the active claim condition.
        function getActiveClaimConditionId() public view returns (uint256) {
            for (uint256 i = claimCondition.currentStartId + claimCondition.count; i > claimCondition.currentStartId; i--) {
                if (block.timestamp >= claimCondition.conditions[i - 1].startTimestamp) {
                    return i - 1;
                }
            }
    
            revert DropNoActiveCondition();
        }
    
        /// @dev Returns the claim condition at the given uid.
        function getClaimConditionById(uint256 _conditionId) external view returns (ClaimCondition memory condition) {
            condition = claimCondition.conditions[_conditionId];
        }
    
        /// @dev Returns the supply claimed by claimer for a given conditionId.
        function getSupplyClaimedByWallet(
            uint256 _conditionId,
            address _claimer
        ) public view returns (uint256 supplyClaimedByWallet) {
            supplyClaimedByWallet = claimCondition.supplyClaimedByWallet[_conditionId][_claimer];
        }
    
        /*////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
            Optional hooks that can be implemented in the derived contract
        ///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////*/
    
        /// @dev Exposes the ability to override the msg sender.
        function _dropMsgSender() internal virtual returns (address) {
            return msg.sender;
        }
    
        /// @dev Runs before every `claim` function call.
        function _beforeClaim(
            address _receiver,
            uint256 _quantity,
            address _currency,
            uint256 _pricePerToken,
            AllowlistProof calldata _allowlistProof,
            bytes memory _data
        ) internal virtual {}
    
        /// @dev Runs after every `claim` function call.
        function _afterClaim(
            address _receiver,
            uint256 _quantity,
            address _currency,
            uint256 _pricePerToken,
            AllowlistProof calldata _allowlistProof,
            bytes memory _data
        ) internal virtual {}
    
        /*///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
            Virtual functions: to be implemented in derived contract
        //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////*/
    
        /// @dev Collects and distributes the primary sale value of NFTs being claimed.
        function _collectPriceOnClaim(
            address _primarySaleRecipient,
            uint256 _quantityToClaim,
            address _currency,
            uint256 _pricePerToken
        ) internal virtual;
    
        /// @dev Transfers the NFTs being claimed.
        function _transferTokensOnClaim(
            address _to,
            uint256 _quantityBeingClaimed
        ) internal virtual returns (uint256 startTokenId);
    
        /// @dev Determine what wallet can update claim conditions
        function _canSetClaimConditions() internal view virtual returns (bool);
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /// @author thirdweb
    
    import "./interface/ILazyMint.sol";
    import "./BatchMintMetadata.sol";
    
    /**
     *  The `LazyMint` is a contract extension for any base NFT contract. It lets you 'lazy mint' any number of NFTs
     *  at once. Here, 'lazy mint' means defining the metadata for particular tokenIds of your NFT contract, without actually
     *  minting a non-zero balance of NFTs of those tokenIds.
     */
    
    abstract contract LazyMint is ILazyMint, BatchMintMetadata {
        /// @dev The sender is not authorized to perform the action
        error LazyMintUnauthorized();
        error LazyMintInvalidAmount();
    
        /// @notice The tokenId assigned to the next new NFT to be lazy minted.
        uint256 internal nextTokenIdToLazyMint;
    
        /**
         *  @notice                  Lets an authorized address lazy mint a given amount of NFTs.
         *
         *  @param _amount           The number of NFTs to lazy mint.
         *  @param _baseURIForTokens The base URI for the 'n' number of NFTs being lazy minted, where the metadata for each
         *                           of those NFTs is `${baseURIForTokens}/${tokenId}`.
         *  @param _data             Additional bytes data to be used at the discretion of the consumer of the contract.
         *  @return batchId          A unique integer identifier for the batch of NFTs lazy minted together.
         */
        function lazyMint(
            uint256 _amount,
            string calldata _baseURIForTokens,
            bytes calldata _data
        ) public virtual override returns (uint256 batchId) {
            if (!_canLazyMint()) {
                revert LazyMintUnauthorized();
            }
    
            if (_amount == 0) {
                revert LazyMintInvalidAmount();
            }
    
            uint256 startId = nextTokenIdToLazyMint;
    
            (nextTokenIdToLazyMint, batchId) = _batchMintMetadata(startId, _amount, _baseURIForTokens);
    
            emit TokensLazyMinted(startId, startId + _amount - 1, _baseURIForTokens, _data);
    
            return batchId;
        }
    
        /// @dev Returns whether lazy minting can be performed in the given execution context.
        function _canLazyMint() internal view virtual returns (bool);
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache 2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /// @author thirdweb
    
    import "../lib/Address.sol";
    import "./interface/IMulticall.sol";
    
    /**
     * @dev Provides a function to batch together multiple calls in a single external call.
     *
     * _Available since v4.1._
     */
    contract Multicall is IMulticall {
        /**
         *  @notice Receives and executes a batch of function calls on this contract.
         *  @dev Receives and executes a batch of function calls on this contract.
         *
         *  @param data The bytes data that makes up the batch of function calls to execute.
         *  @return results The bytes data that makes up the result of the batch of function calls executed.
         */
        function multicall(bytes[] calldata data) external returns (bytes[] memory results) {
            results = new bytes[](data.length);
            address sender = _msgSender();
            bool isForwarder = msg.sender != sender;
            for (uint256 i = 0; i < data.length; i++) {
                if (isForwarder) {
                    results[i] = Address.functionDelegateCall(address(this), abi.encodePacked(data[i], sender));
                } else {
                    results[i] = Address.functionDelegateCall(address(this), data[i]);
                }
            }
            return results;
        }
    
        /// @notice Returns the sender in the given execution context.
        function _msgSender() internal view virtual returns (address) {
            return msg.sender;
        }
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /// @author thirdweb
    
    import "./interface/IOwnable.sol";
    
    /**
     *  @title   Ownable
     *  @notice  Thirdweb's `Ownable` is a contract extension to be used with any base contract. It exposes functions for setting and reading
     *           who the 'owner' of the inheriting smart contract is, and lets the inheriting contract perform conditional logic that uses
     *           information about who the contract's owner is.
     */
    
    abstract contract Ownable is IOwnable {
        /// @dev The sender is not authorized to perform the action
        error OwnableUnauthorized();
    
        /// @dev Owner of the contract (purpose: OpenSea compatibility)
        address private _owner;
    
        /// @dev Reverts if caller is not the owner.
        modifier onlyOwner() {
            if (msg.sender != _owner) {
                revert OwnableUnauthorized();
            }
            _;
        }
    
        /**
         *  @notice Returns the owner of the contract.
         */
        function owner() public view override returns (address) {
            return _owner;
        }
    
        /**
         *  @notice Lets an authorized wallet set a new owner for the contract.
         *  @param _newOwner The address to set as the new owner of the contract.
         */
        function setOwner(address _newOwner) external override {
            if (!_canSetOwner()) {
                revert OwnableUnauthorized();
            }
            _setupOwner(_newOwner);
        }
    
        /// @dev Lets a contract admin set a new owner for the contract. The new owner must be a contract admin.
        function _setupOwner(address _newOwner) internal {
            address _prevOwner = _owner;
            _owner = _newOwner;
    
            emit OwnerUpdated(_prevOwner, _newOwner);
        }
    
        /// @dev Returns whether owner can be set in the given execution context.
        function _canSetOwner() internal view virtual returns (bool);
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /// @author thirdweb
    
    import "./interface/IPermissions.sol";
    import "../lib/Strings.sol";
    
    /**
     *  @title   Permissions
     *  @dev     This contracts provides extending-contracts with role-based access control mechanisms
     */
    contract Permissions is IPermissions {
        /// @dev The `account` is missing a role.
        error PermissionsUnauthorizedAccount(address account, bytes32 neededRole);
    
        /// @dev The `account` already is a holder of `role`
        error PermissionsAlreadyGranted(address account, bytes32 role);
    
        /// @dev Invalid priviledge to revoke
        error PermissionsInvalidPermission(address expected, address actual);
    
        /// @dev Map from keccak256 hash of a role => a map from address => whether address has role.
        mapping(bytes32 => mapping(address => bool)) private _hasRole;
    
        /// @dev Map from keccak256 hash of a role to role admin. See {getRoleAdmin}.
        mapping(bytes32 => bytes32) private _getRoleAdmin;
    
        /// @dev Default admin role for all roles. Only accounts with this role can grant/revoke other roles.
        bytes32 public constant DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE = 0x00;
    
        /// @dev Modifier that checks if an account has the specified role; reverts otherwise.
        modifier onlyRole(bytes32 role) {
            _checkRole(role, msg.sender);
            _;
        }
    
        /**
         *  @notice         Checks whether an account has a particular role.
         *  @dev            Returns `true` if `account` has been granted `role`.
         *
         *  @param role     keccak256 hash of the role. e.g. keccak256("TRANSFER_ROLE")
         *  @param account  Address of the account for which the role is being checked.
         */
        function hasRole(bytes32 role, address account) public view override returns (bool) {
            return _hasRole[role][account];
        }
    
        /**
         *  @notice         Checks whether an account has a particular role;
         *                  role restrictions can be swtiched on and off.
         *
         *  @dev            Returns `true` if `account` has been granted `role`.
         *                  Role restrictions can be swtiched on and off:
         *                      - If address(0) has ROLE, then the ROLE restrictions
         *                        don't apply.
         *                      - If address(0) does not have ROLE, then the ROLE
         *                        restrictions will apply.
         *
         *  @param role     keccak256 hash of the role. e.g. keccak256("TRANSFER_ROLE")
         *  @param account  Address of the account for which the role is being checked.
         */
        function hasRoleWithSwitch(bytes32 role, address account) public view returns (bool) {
            if (!_hasRole[role][address(0)]) {
                return _hasRole[role][account];
            }
    
            return true;
        }
    
        /**
         *  @notice         Returns the admin role that controls the specified role.
         *  @dev            See {grantRole} and {revokeRole}.
         *                  To change a role's admin, use {_setRoleAdmin}.
         *
         *  @param role     keccak256 hash of the role. e.g. keccak256("TRANSFER_ROLE")
         */
        function getRoleAdmin(bytes32 role) external view override returns (bytes32) {
            return _getRoleAdmin[role];
        }
    
        /**
         *  @notice         Grants a role to an account, if not previously granted.
         *  @dev            Caller must have admin role for the `role`.
         *                  Emits {RoleGranted Event}.
         *
         *  @param role     keccak256 hash of the role. e.g. keccak256("TRANSFER_ROLE")
         *  @param account  Address of the account to which the role is being granted.
         */
        function grantRole(bytes32 role, address account) public virtual override {
            _checkRole(_getRoleAdmin[role], msg.sender);
            if (_hasRole[role][account]) {
                revert PermissionsAlreadyGranted(account, role);
            }
            _setupRole(role, account);
        }
    
        /**
         *  @notice         Revokes role from an account.
         *  @dev            Caller must have admin role for the `role`.
         *                  Emits {RoleRevoked Event}.
         *
         *  @param role     keccak256 hash of the role. e.g. keccak256("TRANSFER_ROLE")
         *  @param account  Address of the account from which the role is being revoked.
         */
        function revokeRole(bytes32 role, address account) public virtual override {
            _checkRole(_getRoleAdmin[role], msg.sender);
            _revokeRole(role, account);
        }
    
        /**
         *  @notice         Revokes role from the account.
         *  @dev            Caller must have the `role`, with caller being the same as `account`.
         *                  Emits {RoleRevoked Event}.
         *
         *  @param role     keccak256 hash of the role. e.g. keccak256("TRANSFER_ROLE")
         *  @param account  Address of the account from which the role is being revoked.
         */
        function renounceRole(bytes32 role, address account) public virtual override {
            if (msg.sender != account) {
                revert PermissionsInvalidPermission(msg.sender, account);
            }
            _revokeRole(role, account);
        }
    
        /// @dev Sets `adminRole` as `role`'s admin role.
        function _setRoleAdmin(bytes32 role, bytes32 adminRole) internal virtual {
            bytes32 previousAdminRole = _getRoleAdmin[role];
            _getRoleAdmin[role] = adminRole;
            emit RoleAdminChanged(role, previousAdminRole, adminRole);
        }
    
        /// @dev Sets up `role` for `account`
        function _setupRole(bytes32 role, address account) internal virtual {
            _hasRole[role][account] = true;
            emit RoleGranted(role, account, msg.sender);
        }
    
        /// @dev Revokes `role` from `account`
        function _revokeRole(bytes32 role, address account) internal virtual {
            _checkRole(role, account);
            delete _hasRole[role][account];
            emit RoleRevoked(role, account, msg.sender);
        }
    
        /// @dev Checks `role` for `account`. Reverts with a message including the required role.
        function _checkRole(bytes32 role, address account) internal view virtual {
            if (!_hasRole[role][account]) {
                revert PermissionsUnauthorizedAccount(account, role);
            }
        }
    
        /// @dev Checks `role` for `account`. Reverts with a message including the required role.
        function _checkRoleWithSwitch(bytes32 role, address account) internal view virtual {
            if (!hasRoleWithSwitch(role, account)) {
                revert PermissionsUnauthorizedAccount(account, role);
            }
        }
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /// @author thirdweb
    
    import "./interface/IPermissionsEnumerable.sol";
    import "./Permissions.sol";
    
    /**
     *  @title   PermissionsEnumerable
     *  @dev     This contracts provides extending-contracts with role-based access control mechanisms.
     *           Also provides interfaces to view all members with a given role, and total count of members.
     */
    contract PermissionsEnumerable is IPermissionsEnumerable, Permissions {
        /**
         *  @notice A data structure to store data of members for a given role.
         *
         *  @param index    Current index in the list of accounts that have a role.
         *  @param members  map from index => address of account that has a role
         *  @param indexOf  map from address => index which the account has.
         */
        struct RoleMembers {
            uint256 index;
            mapping(uint256 => address) members;
            mapping(address => uint256) indexOf;
        }
    
        /// @dev map from keccak256 hash of a role to its members' data. See {RoleMembers}.
        mapping(bytes32 => RoleMembers) private roleMembers;
    
        /**
         *  @notice         Returns the role-member from a list of members for a role,
         *                  at a given index.
         *  @dev            Returns `member` who has `role`, at `index` of role-members list.
         *                  See struct {RoleMembers}, and mapping {roleMembers}
         *
         *  @param role     keccak256 hash of the role. e.g. keccak256("TRANSFER_ROLE")
         *  @param index    Index in list of current members for the role.
         *
         *  @return member  Address of account that has `role`
         */
        function getRoleMember(bytes32 role, uint256 index) external view override returns (address member) {
            uint256 currentIndex = roleMembers[role].index;
            uint256 check;
    
            for (uint256 i = 0; i < currentIndex; i += 1) {
                if (roleMembers[role].members[i] != address(0)) {
                    if (check == index) {
                        member = roleMembers[role].members[i];
                        return member;
                    }
                    check += 1;
                } else if (hasRole(role, address(0)) && i == roleMembers[role].indexOf[address(0)]) {
                    check += 1;
                }
            }
        }
    
        /**
         *  @notice         Returns total number of accounts that have a role.
         *  @dev            Returns `count` of accounts that have `role`.
         *                  See struct {RoleMembers}, and mapping {roleMembers}
         *
         *  @param role     keccak256 hash of the role. e.g. keccak256("TRANSFER_ROLE")
         *
         *  @return count   Total number of accounts that have `role`
         */
        function getRoleMemberCount(bytes32 role) external view override returns (uint256 count) {
            uint256 currentIndex = roleMembers[role].index;
    
            for (uint256 i = 0; i < currentIndex; i += 1) {
                if (roleMembers[role].members[i] != address(0)) {
                    count += 1;
                }
            }
            if (hasRole(role, address(0))) {
                count += 1;
            }
        }
    
        /// @dev Revokes `role` from `account`, and removes `account` from {roleMembers}
        ///      See {_removeMember}
        function _revokeRole(bytes32 role, address account) internal override {
            super._revokeRole(role, account);
            _removeMember(role, account);
        }
    
        /// @dev Grants `role` to `account`, and adds `account` to {roleMembers}
        ///      See {_addMember}
        function _setupRole(bytes32 role, address account) internal override {
            super._setupRole(role, account);
            _addMember(role, account);
        }
    
        /// @dev adds `account` to {roleMembers}, for `role`
        function _addMember(bytes32 role, address account) internal {
            uint256 idx = roleMembers[role].index;
            roleMembers[role].index += 1;
    
            roleMembers[role].members[idx] = account;
            roleMembers[role].indexOf[account] = idx;
        }
    
        /// @dev removes `account` from {roleMembers}, for `role`
        function _removeMember(bytes32 role, address account) internal {
            uint256 idx = roleMembers[role].indexOf[account];
    
            delete roleMembers[role].members[idx];
            delete roleMembers[role].indexOf[account];
        }
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /// @author thirdweb
    
    import "./interface/IPlatformFee.sol";
    
    /**
     *  @title   Platform Fee
     *  @notice  Thirdweb's `PlatformFee` is a contract extension to be used with any base contract. It exposes functions for setting and reading
     *           the recipient of platform fee and the platform fee basis points, and lets the inheriting contract perform conditional logic
     *           that uses information about platform fees, if desired.
     */
    
    abstract contract PlatformFee is IPlatformFee {
        /// @dev The sender is not authorized to perform the action
        error PlatformFeeUnauthorized();
    
        /// @dev The recipient is invalid
        error PlatformFeeInvalidRecipient(address recipient);
    
        /// @dev The fee bps exceeded the max value
        error PlatformFeeExceededMaxFeeBps(uint256 max, uint256 actual);
    
        /// @dev The address that receives all platform fees from all sales.
        address private platformFeeRecipient;
    
        /// @dev The % of primary sales collected as platform fees.
        uint16 private platformFeeBps;
    
        /// @dev Fee type variants: percentage fee and flat fee
        PlatformFeeType private platformFeeType;
    
        /// @dev The flat amount collected by the contract as fees on primary sales.
        uint256 private flatPlatformFee;
    
        /// @dev Returns the platform fee recipient and bps.
        function getPlatformFeeInfo() public view override returns (address, uint16) {
            return (platformFeeRecipient, uint16(platformFeeBps));
        }
    
        /// @dev Returns the platform fee bps and recipient.
        function getFlatPlatformFeeInfo() public view returns (address, uint256) {
            return (platformFeeRecipient, flatPlatformFee);
        }
    
        /// @dev Returns the platform fee type.
        function getPlatformFeeType() public view returns (PlatformFeeType) {
            return platformFeeType;
        }
    
        /**
         *  @notice         Updates the platform fee recipient and bps.
         *  @dev            Caller should be authorized to set platform fee info.
         *                  See {_canSetPlatformFeeInfo}.
         *                  Emits {PlatformFeeInfoUpdated Event}; See {_setupPlatformFeeInfo}.
         *
         *  @param _platformFeeRecipient   Address to be set as new platformFeeRecipient.
         *  @param _platformFeeBps         Updated platformFeeBps.
         */
        function setPlatformFeeInfo(address _platformFeeRecipient, uint256 _platformFeeBps) external override {
            if (!_canSetPlatformFeeInfo()) {
                revert PlatformFeeUnauthorized();
            }
            _setupPlatformFeeInfo(_platformFeeRecipient, _platformFeeBps);
        }
    
        /// @dev Sets the platform fee recipient and bps
        function _setupPlatformFeeInfo(address _platformFeeRecipient, uint256 _platformFeeBps) internal {
            if (_platformFeeBps > 10_000) {
                revert PlatformFeeExceededMaxFeeBps(10_000, _platformFeeBps);
            }
            if (_platformFeeRecipient == address(0)) {
                revert PlatformFeeInvalidRecipient(_platformFeeRecipient);
            }
    
            platformFeeBps = uint16(_platformFeeBps);
            platformFeeRecipient = _platformFeeRecipient;
    
            emit PlatformFeeInfoUpdated(_platformFeeRecipient, _platformFeeBps);
        }
    
        /// @notice Lets a module admin set a flat fee on primary sales.
        function setFlatPlatformFeeInfo(address _platformFeeRecipient, uint256 _flatFee) external {
            if (!_canSetPlatformFeeInfo()) {
                revert PlatformFeeUnauthorized();
            }
    
            _setupFlatPlatformFeeInfo(_platformFeeRecipient, _flatFee);
        }
    
        /// @dev Sets a flat fee on primary sales.
        function _setupFlatPlatformFeeInfo(address _platformFeeRecipient, uint256 _flatFee) internal {
            flatPlatformFee = _flatFee;
            platformFeeRecipient = _platformFeeRecipient;
    
            emit FlatPlatformFeeUpdated(_platformFeeRecipient, _flatFee);
        }
    
        /// @notice Lets a module admin set platform fee type.
        function setPlatformFeeType(PlatformFeeType _feeType) external {
            if (!_canSetPlatformFeeInfo()) {
                revert PlatformFeeUnauthorized();
            }
            _setupPlatformFeeType(_feeType);
        }
    
        /// @dev Sets platform fee type.
        function _setupPlatformFeeType(PlatformFeeType _feeType) internal {
            platformFeeType = _feeType;
    
            emit PlatformFeeTypeUpdated(_feeType);
        }
    
        /// @dev Returns whether platform fee info can be set in the given execution context.
        function _canSetPlatformFeeInfo() internal view virtual returns (bool);
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /// @author thirdweb
    
    import "./interface/IPrimarySale.sol";
    
    /**
     *  @title   Primary Sale
     *  @notice  Thirdweb's `PrimarySale` is a contract extension to be used with any base contract. It exposes functions for setting and reading
     *           the recipient of primary sales, and lets the inheriting contract perform conditional logic that uses information about
     *           primary sales, if desired.
     */
    
    abstract contract PrimarySale is IPrimarySale {
        /// @dev The sender is not authorized to perform the action
        error PrimarySaleUnauthorized();
    
        /// @dev The recipient is invalid
        error PrimarySaleInvalidRecipient(address recipient);
    
        /// @dev The address that receives all primary sales value.
        address private recipient;
    
        /// @dev Returns primary sale recipient address.
        function primarySaleRecipient() public view override returns (address) {
            return recipient;
        }
    
        /**
         *  @notice         Updates primary sale recipient.
         *  @dev            Caller should be authorized to set primary sales info.
         *                  See {_canSetPrimarySaleRecipient}.
         *                  Emits {PrimarySaleRecipientUpdated Event}; See {_setupPrimarySaleRecipient}.
         *
         *  @param _saleRecipient   Address to be set as new recipient of primary sales.
         */
        function setPrimarySaleRecipient(address _saleRecipient) external override {
            if (!_canSetPrimarySaleRecipient()) {
                revert PrimarySaleUnauthorized();
            }
            _setupPrimarySaleRecipient(_saleRecipient);
        }
    
        /// @dev Lets a contract admin set the recipient for all primary sales.
        function _setupPrimarySaleRecipient(address _saleRecipient) internal {
            if (_saleRecipient == address(0)) {
                revert PrimarySaleInvalidRecipient(_saleRecipient);
            }
    
            recipient = _saleRecipient;
            emit PrimarySaleRecipientUpdated(_saleRecipient);
        }
    
        /// @dev Returns whether primary sale recipient can be set in the given execution context.
        function _canSetPrimarySaleRecipient() internal view virtual returns (bool);
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /// @author thirdweb
    
    import "./interface/IRoyalty.sol";
    
    /**
     *  @title   Royalty
     *  @notice  Thirdweb's `Royalty` is a contract extension to be used with any base contract. It exposes functions for setting and reading
     *           the recipient of royalty fee and the royalty fee basis points, and lets the inheriting contract perform conditional logic
     *           that uses information about royalty fees, if desired.
     *
     *  @dev     The `Royalty` contract is ERC2981 compliant.
     */
    
    abstract contract Royalty is IRoyalty {
        /// @dev The sender is not authorized to perform the action
        error RoyaltyUnauthorized();
    
        /// @dev The recipient is invalid
        error RoyaltyInvalidRecipient(address recipient);
    
        /// @dev The fee bps exceeded the max value
        error RoyaltyExceededMaxFeeBps(uint256 max, uint256 actual);
    
        /// @dev The (default) address that receives all royalty value.
        address private royaltyRecipient;
    
        /// @dev The (default) % of a sale to take as royalty (in basis points).
        uint16 private royaltyBps;
    
        /// @dev Token ID => royalty recipient and bps for token
        mapping(uint256 => RoyaltyInfo) private royaltyInfoForToken;
    
        /**
         *  @notice   View royalty info for a given token and sale price.
         *  @dev      Returns royalty amount and recipient for `tokenId` and `salePrice`.
         *  @param tokenId          The tokenID of the NFT for which to query royalty info.
         *  @param salePrice        Sale price of the token.
         *
         *  @return receiver        Address of royalty recipient account.
         *  @return royaltyAmount   Royalty amount calculated at current royaltyBps value.
         */
        function royaltyInfo(
            uint256 tokenId,
            uint256 salePrice
        ) external view virtual override returns (address receiver, uint256 royaltyAmount) {
            (address recipient, uint256 bps) = getRoyaltyInfoForToken(tokenId);
            receiver = recipient;
            royaltyAmount = (salePrice * bps) / 10_000;
        }
    
        /**
         *  @notice          View royalty info for a given token.
         *  @dev             Returns royalty recipient and bps for `_tokenId`.
         *  @param _tokenId  The tokenID of the NFT for which to query royalty info.
         */
        function getRoyaltyInfoForToken(uint256 _tokenId) public view override returns (address, uint16) {
            RoyaltyInfo memory royaltyForToken = royaltyInfoForToken[_tokenId];
    
            return
                royaltyForToken.recipient == address(0)
                    ? (royaltyRecipient, uint16(royaltyBps))
                    : (royaltyForToken.recipient, uint16(royaltyForToken.bps));
        }
    
        /**
         *  @notice Returns the defualt royalty recipient and BPS for this contract's NFTs.
         */
        function getDefaultRoyaltyInfo() external view override returns (address, uint16) {
            return (royaltyRecipient, uint16(royaltyBps));
        }
    
        /**
         *  @notice         Updates default royalty recipient and bps.
         *  @dev            Caller should be authorized to set royalty info.
         *                  See {_canSetRoyaltyInfo}.
         *                  Emits {DefaultRoyalty Event}; See {_setupDefaultRoyaltyInfo}.
         *
         *  @param _royaltyRecipient   Address to be set as default royalty recipient.
         *  @param _royaltyBps         Updated royalty bps.
         */
        function setDefaultRoyaltyInfo(address _royaltyRecipient, uint256 _royaltyBps) external override {
            if (!_canSetRoyaltyInfo()) {
                revert RoyaltyUnauthorized();
            }
    
            _setupDefaultRoyaltyInfo(_royaltyRecipient, _royaltyBps);
        }
    
        /// @dev Lets a contract admin update the default royalty recipient and bps.
        function _setupDefaultRoyaltyInfo(address _royaltyRecipient, uint256 _royaltyBps) internal {
            if (_royaltyBps > 10_000) {
                revert RoyaltyExceededMaxFeeBps(10_000, _royaltyBps);
            }
    
            royaltyRecipient = _royaltyRecipient;
            royaltyBps = uint16(_royaltyBps);
    
            emit DefaultRoyalty(_royaltyRecipient, _royaltyBps);
        }
    
        /**
         *  @notice         Updates default royalty recipient and bps for a particular token.
         *  @dev            Sets royalty info for `_tokenId`. Caller should be authorized to set royalty info.
         *                  See {_canSetRoyaltyInfo}.
         *                  Emits {RoyaltyForToken Event}; See {_setupRoyaltyInfoForToken}.
         *
         *  @param _recipient   Address to be set as royalty recipient for given token Id.
         *  @param _bps         Updated royalty bps for the token Id.
         */
        function setRoyaltyInfoForToken(uint256 _tokenId, address _recipient, uint256 _bps) external override {
            if (!_canSetRoyaltyInfo()) {
                revert RoyaltyUnauthorized();
            }
    
            _setupRoyaltyInfoForToken(_tokenId, _recipient, _bps);
        }
    
        /// @dev Lets a contract admin set the royalty recipient and bps for a particular token Id.
        function _setupRoyaltyInfoForToken(uint256 _tokenId, address _recipient, uint256 _bps) internal {
            if (_bps > 10_000) {
                revert RoyaltyExceededMaxFeeBps(10_000, _bps);
            }
    
            royaltyInfoForToken[_tokenId] = RoyaltyInfo({ recipient: _recipient, bps: _bps });
    
            emit RoyaltyForToken(_tokenId, _recipient, _bps);
        }
    
        /// @dev Returns whether royalty info can be set in the given execution context.
        function _canSetRoyaltyInfo() internal view virtual returns (bool);
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /// @author thirdweb
    
    /**
     *  The interface `IClaimCondition` is written for thirdweb's 'Drop' contracts, which are distribution mechanisms for tokens.
     *
     *  A claim condition defines criteria under which accounts can mint tokens. Claim conditions can be overwritten
     *  or added to by the contract admin. At any moment, there is only one active claim condition.
     */
    
    interface IClaimCondition {
        /**
         *  @notice The criteria that make up a claim condition.
         *
         *  @param startTimestamp                 The unix timestamp after which the claim condition applies.
         *                                        The same claim condition applies until the `startTimestamp`
         *                                        of the next claim condition.
         *
         *  @param maxClaimableSupply             The maximum total number of tokens that can be claimed under
         *                                        the claim condition.
         *
         *  @param supplyClaimed                  At any given point, the number of tokens that have been claimed
         *                                        under the claim condition.
         *
         *  @param quantityLimitPerWallet         The maximum number of tokens that can be claimed by a wallet.
         *
         *  @param merkleRoot                     The allowlist of addresses that can claim tokens under the claim
         *                                        condition.
         *
         *  @param pricePerToken                  The price required to pay per token claimed.
         *
         *  @param currency                       The currency in which the `pricePerToken` must be paid.
         *
         *  @param metadata                       Claim condition metadata.
         */
        struct ClaimCondition {
            uint256 startTimestamp;
            uint256 maxClaimableSupply;
            uint256 supplyClaimed;
            uint256 quantityLimitPerWallet;
            bytes32 merkleRoot;
            uint256 pricePerToken;
            address currency;
            string metadata;
        }
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /// @author thirdweb
    
    import "./IClaimCondition.sol";
    
    /**
     *  The interface `IClaimConditionMultiPhase` is written for thirdweb's 'Drop' contracts, which are distribution mechanisms for tokens.
     *
     *  An authorized wallet can set a series of claim conditions, ordered by their respective `startTimestamp`.
     *  A claim condition defines criteria under which accounts can mint tokens. Claim conditions can be overwritten
     *  or added to by the contract admin. At any moment, there is only one active claim condition.
     */
    
    interface IClaimConditionMultiPhase is IClaimCondition {
        /**
         *  @notice The set of all claim conditions, at any given moment.
         *  Claim Phase ID = [currentStartId, currentStartId + length - 1];
         *
         *  @param currentStartId           The uid for the first claim condition amongst the current set of
         *                                  claim conditions. The uid for each next claim condition is one
         *                                  more than the previous claim condition's uid.
         *
         *  @param count                    The total number of phases / claim conditions in the list
         *                                  of claim conditions.
         *
         *  @param conditions                   The claim conditions at a given uid. Claim conditions
         *                                  are ordered in an ascending order by their `startTimestamp`.
         *
         *  @param supplyClaimedByWallet    Map from a claim condition uid and account to supply claimed by account.
         */
        struct ClaimConditionList {
            uint256 currentStartId;
            uint256 count;
            mapping(uint256 => ClaimCondition) conditions;
            mapping(uint256 => mapping(address => uint256)) supplyClaimedByWallet;
        }
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /// @author thirdweb
    
    /**
     *  Thirdweb's `ContractMetadata` is a contract extension for any base contracts. It lets you set a metadata URI
     *  for you contract.
     *
     *  Additionally, `ContractMetadata` is necessary for NFT contracts that want royalties to get distributed on OpenSea.
     */
    
    interface IContractMetadata {
        /// @dev Returns the metadata URI of the contract.
        function contractURI() external view returns (string memory);
    
        /**
         *  @dev Sets contract URI for the storefront-level metadata of the contract.
         *       Only module admin can call this function.
         */
        function setContractURI(string calldata _uri) external;
    
        /// @dev Emitted when the contract URI is updated.
        event ContractURIUpdated(string prevURI, string newURI);
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /// @author thirdweb
    
    /**
     *  Thirdweb's `DelayedReveal` is a contract extension for base NFT contracts. It lets you create batches of
     *  'delayed-reveal' NFTs. You can learn more about the usage of delayed reveal NFTs here - https://blog.thirdweb.com/delayed-reveal-nfts
     */
    
    interface IDelayedReveal {
        /// @dev Emitted when tokens are revealed.
        event TokenURIRevealed(uint256 indexed index, string revealedURI);
    
        /**
         *  @notice Reveals a batch of delayed reveal NFTs.
         *
         *  @param identifier The ID for the batch of delayed-reveal NFTs to reveal.
         *
         *  @param key        The key with which the base URI for the relevant batch of NFTs was encrypted.
         */
        function reveal(uint256 identifier, bytes calldata key) external returns (string memory revealedURI);
    
        /**
         *  @notice Performs XOR encryption/decryption.
         *
         *  @param data The data to encrypt. In the case of delayed-reveal NFTs, this is the "revealed" state
         *              base URI of the relevant batch of NFTs.
         *
         *  @param key  The key with which to encrypt data
         */
        function encryptDecrypt(bytes memory data, bytes calldata key) external pure returns (bytes memory result);
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /// @author thirdweb
    
    import "./IClaimConditionMultiPhase.sol";
    
    /**
     *  The interface `IDrop` is written for thirdweb's 'Drop' contracts, which are distribution mechanisms for tokens.
     *
     *  An authorized wallet can set a series of claim conditions, ordered by their respective `startTimestamp`.
     *  A claim condition defines criteria under which accounts can mint tokens. Claim conditions can be overwritten
     *  or added to by the contract admin. At any moment, there is only one active claim condition.
     */
    
    interface IDrop is IClaimConditionMultiPhase {
        /**
         *  @param proof Proof of concerned wallet's inclusion in an allowlist.
         *  @param quantityLimitPerWallet The total quantity of tokens the allowlisted wallet is eligible to claim over time.
         *  @param pricePerToken The price per token the allowlisted wallet must pay to claim tokens.
         *  @param currency The currency in which the allowlisted wallet must pay the price for claiming tokens.
         */
        struct AllowlistProof {
            bytes32[] proof;
            uint256 quantityLimitPerWallet;
            uint256 pricePerToken;
            address currency;
        }
    
        /// @notice Emitted when tokens are claimed via `claim`.
        event TokensClaimed(
            uint256 indexed claimConditionIndex,
            address indexed claimer,
            address indexed receiver,
            uint256 startTokenId,
            uint256 quantityClaimed
        );
    
        /// @notice Emitted when the contract's claim conditions are updated.
        event ClaimConditionsUpdated(ClaimCondition[] claimConditions, bool resetEligibility);
    
        /**
         *  @notice Lets an account claim a given quantity of NFTs.
         *
         *  @param receiver                       The receiver of the NFTs to claim.
         *  @param quantity                       The quantity of NFTs to claim.
         *  @param currency                       The currency in which to pay for the claim.
         *  @param pricePerToken                  The price per token to pay for the claim.
         *  @param allowlistProof                 The proof of the claimer's inclusion in the merkle root allowlist
         *                                        of the claim conditions that apply.
         *  @param data                           Arbitrary bytes data that can be leveraged in the implementation of this interface.
         */
        function claim(
            address receiver,
            uint256 quantity,
            address currency,
            uint256 pricePerToken,
            AllowlistProof calldata allowlistProof,
            bytes memory data
        ) external payable;
    
        /**
         *  @notice Lets a contract admin (account with `DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE`) set claim conditions.
         *
         *  @param phases                   Claim conditions in ascending order by `startTimestamp`.
         *
         *  @param resetClaimEligibility    Whether to honor the restrictions applied to wallets who have claimed tokens in the current conditions,
         *                                  in the new claim conditions being set.
         *
         */
        function setClaimConditions(ClaimCondition[] calldata phases, bool resetClaimEligibility) external;
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /// @author thirdweb
    
    /**
     *  Thirdweb's `LazyMint` is a contract extension for any base NFT contract. It lets you 'lazy mint' any number of NFTs
     *  at once. Here, 'lazy mint' means defining the metadata for particular tokenIds of your NFT contract, without actually
     *  minting a non-zero balance of NFTs of those tokenIds.
     */
    
    interface ILazyMint {
        /// @dev Emitted when tokens are lazy minted.
        event TokensLazyMinted(uint256 indexed startTokenId, uint256 endTokenId, string baseURI, bytes encryptedBaseURI);
    
        /**
         *  @notice Lazy mints a given amount of NFTs.
         *
         *  @param amount           The number of NFTs to lazy mint.
         *
         *  @param baseURIForTokens The base URI for the 'n' number of NFTs being lazy minted, where the metadata for each
         *                          of those NFTs is `${baseURIForTokens}/${tokenId}`.
         *
         *  @param extraData        Additional bytes data to be used at the discretion of the consumer of the contract.
         *
         *  @return batchId         A unique integer identifier for the batch of NFTs lazy minted together.
         */
        function lazyMint(
            uint256 amount,
            string calldata baseURIForTokens,
            bytes calldata extraData
        ) external returns (uint256 batchId);
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /// @author thirdweb
    
    /**
     * @dev Provides a function to batch together multiple calls in a single external call.
     *
     * _Available since v4.1._
     */
    interface IMulticall {
        /**
         * @dev Receives and executes a batch of function calls on this contract.
         */
        function multicall(bytes[] calldata data) external returns (bytes[] memory results);
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /// @author thirdweb
    
    /**
     *  Thirdweb's `Ownable` is a contract extension to be used with any base contract. It exposes functions for setting and reading
     *  who the 'owner' of the inheriting smart contract is, and lets the inheriting contract perform conditional logic that uses
     *  information about who the contract's owner is.
     */
    
    interface IOwnable {
        /// @dev Returns the owner of the contract.
        function owner() external view returns (address);
    
        /// @dev Lets a module admin set a new owner for the contract. The new owner must be a module admin.
        function setOwner(address _newOwner) external;
    
        /// @dev Emitted when a new Owner is set.
        event OwnerUpdated(address indexed prevOwner, address indexed newOwner);
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /// @author thirdweb
    
    /**
     * @dev External interface of AccessControl declared to support ERC165 detection.
     */
    interface IPermissions {
        /**
         * @dev Emitted when `newAdminRole` is set as ``role``'s admin role, replacing `previousAdminRole`
         *
         * `DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE` is the starting admin for all roles, despite
         * {RoleAdminChanged} not being emitted signaling this.
         *
         * _Available since v3.1._
         */
        event RoleAdminChanged(bytes32 indexed role, bytes32 indexed previousAdminRole, bytes32 indexed newAdminRole);
    
        /**
         * @dev Emitted when `account` is granted `role`.
         *
         * `sender` is the account that originated the contract call, an admin role
         * bearer except when using {AccessControl-_setupRole}.
         */
        event RoleGranted(bytes32 indexed role, address indexed account, address indexed sender);
    
        /**
         * @dev Emitted when `account` is revoked `role`.
         *
         * `sender` is the account that originated the contract call:
         *   - if using `revokeRole`, it is the admin role bearer
         *   - if using `renounceRole`, it is the role bearer (i.e. `account`)
         */
        event RoleRevoked(bytes32 indexed role, address indexed account, address indexed sender);
    
        /**
         * @dev Returns `true` if `account` has been granted `role`.
         */
        function hasRole(bytes32 role, address account) external view returns (bool);
    
        /**
         * @dev Returns the admin role that controls `role`. See {grantRole} and
         * {revokeRole}.
         *
         * To change a role's admin, use {AccessControl-_setRoleAdmin}.
         */
        function getRoleAdmin(bytes32 role) external view returns (bytes32);
    
        /**
         * @dev Grants `role` to `account`.
         *
         * If `account` had not been already granted `role`, emits a {RoleGranted}
         * event.
         *
         * Requirements:
         *
         * - the caller must have ``role``'s admin role.
         */
        function grantRole(bytes32 role, address account) external;
    
        /**
         * @dev Revokes `role` from `account`.
         *
         * If `account` had been granted `role`, emits a {RoleRevoked} event.
         *
         * Requirements:
         *
         * - the caller must have ``role``'s admin role.
         */
        function revokeRole(bytes32 role, address account) external;
    
        /**
         * @dev Revokes `role` from the calling account.
         *
         * Roles are often managed via {grantRole} and {revokeRole}: this function's
         * purpose is to provide a mechanism for accounts to lose their privileges
         * if they are compromised (such as when a trusted device is misplaced).
         *
         * If the calling account had been granted `role`, emits a {RoleRevoked}
         * event.
         *
         * Requirements:
         *
         * - the caller must be `account`.
         */
        function renounceRole(bytes32 role, address account) external;
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /// @author thirdweb
    
    import "./IPermissions.sol";
    
    /**
     * @dev External interface of AccessControlEnumerable declared to support ERC165 detection.
     */
    interface IPermissionsEnumerable is IPermissions {
        /**
         * @dev Returns one of the accounts that have `role`. `index` must be a
         * value between 0 and {getRoleMemberCount}, non-inclusive.
         *
         * Role bearers are not sorted in any particular way, and their ordering may
         * change at any point.
         *
         * WARNING: When using {getRoleMember} and {getRoleMemberCount}, make sure
         * you perform all queries on the same block. See the following
         * [forum post](https://forum.openzeppelin.com/t/iterating-over-elements-on-enumerableset-in-openzeppelin-contracts/2296)
         * for more information.
         */
        function getRoleMember(bytes32 role, uint256 index) external view returns (address);
    
        /**
         * @dev Returns the number of accounts that have `role`. Can be used
         * together with {getRoleMember} to enumerate all bearers of a role.
         */
        function getRoleMemberCount(bytes32 role) external view returns (uint256);
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /// @author thirdweb
    
    /**
     *  Thirdweb's `PlatformFee` is a contract extension to be used with any base contract. It exposes functions for setting and reading
     *  the recipient of platform fee and the platform fee basis points, and lets the inheriting contract perform conditional logic
     *  that uses information about platform fees, if desired.
     */
    
    interface IPlatformFee {
        /// @dev Fee type variants: percentage fee and flat fee
        enum PlatformFeeType {
            Bps,
            Flat
        }
    
        /// @dev Returns the platform fee bps and recipient.
        function getPlatformFeeInfo() external view returns (address, uint16);
    
        /// @dev Lets a module admin update the fees on primary sales.
        function setPlatformFeeInfo(address _platformFeeRecipient, uint256 _platformFeeBps) external;
    
        /// @dev Emitted when fee on primary sales is updated.
        event PlatformFeeInfoUpdated(address indexed platformFeeRecipient, uint256 platformFeeBps);
    
        /// @dev Emitted when the flat platform fee is updated.
        event FlatPlatformFeeUpdated(address platformFeeRecipient, uint256 flatFee);
    
        /// @dev Emitted when the platform fee type is updated.
        event PlatformFeeTypeUpdated(PlatformFeeType feeType);
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /// @author thirdweb
    
    /**
     *  Thirdweb's `Primary` is a contract extension to be used with any base contract. It exposes functions for setting and reading
     *  the recipient of primary sales, and lets the inheriting contract perform conditional logic that uses information about
     *  primary sales, if desired.
     */
    
    interface IPrimarySale {
        /// @dev The adress that receives all primary sales value.
        function primarySaleRecipient() external view returns (address);
    
        /// @dev Lets a module admin set the default recipient of all primary sales.
        function setPrimarySaleRecipient(address _saleRecipient) external;
    
        /// @dev Emitted when a new sale recipient is set.
        event PrimarySaleRecipientUpdated(address indexed recipient);
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /// @author thirdweb
    
    import "../../eip/interface/IERC2981.sol";
    
    /**
     *  Thirdweb's `Royalty` is a contract extension to be used with any base contract. It exposes functions for setting and reading
     *  the recipient of royalty fee and the royalty fee basis points, and lets the inheriting contract perform conditional logic
     *  that uses information about royalty fees, if desired.
     *
     *  The `Royalty` contract is ERC2981 compliant.
     */
    
    interface IRoyalty is IERC2981 {
        struct RoyaltyInfo {
            address recipient;
            uint256 bps;
        }
    
        /// @dev Returns the royalty recipient and fee bps.
        function getDefaultRoyaltyInfo() external view returns (address, uint16);
    
        /// @dev Lets a module admin update the royalty bps and recipient.
        function setDefaultRoyaltyInfo(address _royaltyRecipient, uint256 _royaltyBps) external;
    
        /// @dev Lets a module admin set the royalty recipient for a particular token Id.
        function setRoyaltyInfoForToken(uint256 tokenId, address recipient, uint256 bps) external;
    
        /// @dev Returns the royalty recipient for a particular token Id.
        function getRoyaltyInfoForToken(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (address, uint16);
    
        /// @dev Emitted when royalty info is updated.
        event DefaultRoyalty(address indexed newRoyaltyRecipient, uint256 newRoyaltyBps);
    
        /// @dev Emitted when royalty recipient for tokenId is set
        event RoyaltyForToken(uint256 indexed tokenId, address indexed royaltyRecipient, uint256 royaltyBps);
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
    // OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.0 (metatx/ERC2771Context.sol)
    
    pragma solidity ^0.8.11;
    
    import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/utils/ContextUpgradeable.sol";
    import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/proxy/utils/Initializable.sol";
    
    /**
     * @dev Context variant with ERC2771 support.
     */
    abstract contract ERC2771ContextUpgradeable is Initializable, ContextUpgradeable {
        mapping(address => bool) private _trustedForwarder;
    
        function __ERC2771Context_init(address[] memory trustedForwarder) internal onlyInitializing {
            __Context_init_unchained();
            __ERC2771Context_init_unchained(trustedForwarder);
        }
    
        function __ERC2771Context_init_unchained(address[] memory trustedForwarder) internal onlyInitializing {
            for (uint256 i = 0; i < trustedForwarder.length; i++) {
                _trustedForwarder[trustedForwarder[i]] = true;
            }
        }
    
        function isTrustedForwarder(address forwarder) public view virtual returns (bool) {
            return _trustedForwarder[forwarder];
        }
    
        function _msgSender() internal view virtual override returns (address sender) {
            if (isTrustedForwarder(msg.sender)) {
                // The assembly code is more direct than the Solidity version using `abi.decode`.
                assembly {
                    sender := shr(96, calldataload(sub(calldatasize(), 20)))
                }
            } else {
                return super._msgSender();
            }
        }
    
        function _msgData() internal view virtual override returns (bytes calldata) {
            if (isTrustedForwarder(msg.sender)) {
                return msg.data[:msg.data.length - 20];
            } else {
                return super._msgData();
            }
        }
    
        uint256[49] private __gap;
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
    // OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (token/ERC20/utils/SafeERC20.sol)
    
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    import "../../../../../eip/interface/IERC20.sol";
    import { Address } from "../../../../../lib/Address.sol";
    
    /**
     * @title SafeERC20
     * @dev Wrappers around ERC20 operations that throw on failure (when the token
     * contract returns false). Tokens that return no value (and instead revert or
     * throw on failure) are also supported, non-reverting calls are assumed to be
     * successful.
     * To use this library you can add a `using SafeERC20 for IERC20;` statement to your contract,
     * which allows you to call the safe operations as `token.safeTransfer(...)`, etc.
     */
    library SafeERC20 {
        using Address for address;
    
        function safeTransfer(IERC20 token, address to, uint256 value) internal {
            _callOptionalReturn(token, abi.encodeWithSelector(token.transfer.selector, to, value));
        }
    
        function safeTransferFrom(IERC20 token, address from, address to, uint256 value) internal {
            _callOptionalReturn(token, abi.encodeWithSelector(token.transferFrom.selector, from, to, value));
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Deprecated. This function has issues similar to the ones found in
         * {IERC20-approve}, and its usage is discouraged.
         *
         * Whenever possible, use {safeIncreaseAllowance} and
         * {safeDecreaseAllowance} instead.
         */
        function safeApprove(IERC20 token, address spender, uint256 value) internal {
            // safeApprove should only be called when setting an initial allowance,
            // or when resetting it to zero. To increase and decrease it, use
            // 'safeIncreaseAllowance' and 'safeDecreaseAllowance'
            require(
                (value == 0) || (token.allowance(address(this), spender) == 0),
                "SafeERC20: approve from non-zero to non-zero allowance"
            );
            _callOptionalReturn(token, abi.encodeWithSelector(token.approve.selector, spender, value));
        }
    
        function safeIncreaseAllowance(IERC20 token, address spender, uint256 value) internal {
            uint256 newAllowance = token.allowance(address(this), spender) + value;
            _callOptionalReturn(token, abi.encodeWithSelector(token.approve.selector, spender, newAllowance));
        }
    
        function safeDecreaseAllowance(IERC20 token, address spender, uint256 value) internal {
            unchecked {
                uint256 oldAllowance = token.allowance(address(this), spender);
                require(oldAllowance >= value, "SafeERC20: decreased allowance below zero");
                uint256 newAllowance = oldAllowance - value;
                _callOptionalReturn(token, abi.encodeWithSelector(token.approve.selector, spender, newAllowance));
            }
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Imitates a Solidity high-level call (i.e. a regular function call to a contract), relaxing the requirement
         * on the return value: the return value is optional (but if data is returned, it must not be false).
         * @param token The token targeted by the call.
         * @param data The call data (encoded using abi.encode or one of its variants).
         */
        function _callOptionalReturn(IERC20 token, bytes memory data) private {
            // We need to perform a low level call here, to bypass Solidity's return data size checking mechanism, since
            // we're implementing it ourselves. We use {Address.functionCall} to perform this call, which verifies that
            // the target address contains contract code and also asserts for success in the low-level call.
    
            bytes memory returndata = address(token).functionCall(data, "SafeERC20: low-level call failed");
            if (returndata.length > 0) {
                // Return data is optional
                require(abi.decode(returndata, (bool)), "SafeERC20: ERC20 operation did not succeed");
            }
        }
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    interface IWETH {
        function deposit() external payable;
    
        function withdraw(uint256 amount) external;
    
        function transfer(address to, uint256 value) external returns (bool);
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.1;
    
    /// @author thirdweb, OpenZeppelin Contracts (v4.9.0)
    
    /**
     * @dev Collection of functions related to the address type
     */
    library Address {
        /**
         * @dev Returns true if `account` is a contract.
         *
         * [IMPORTANT]
         * ====
         * It is unsafe to assume that an address for which this function returns
         * false is an externally-owned account (EOA) and not a contract.
         *
         * Among others, `isContract` will return false for the following
         * types of addresses:
         *
         *  - an externally-owned account
         *  - a contract in construction
         *  - an address where a contract will be created
         *  - an address where a contract lived, but was destroyed
         *
         * Furthermore, `isContract` will also return true if the target contract within
         * the same transaction is already scheduled for destruction by `SELFDESTRUCT`,
         * which only has an effect at the end of a transaction.
         * ====
         *
         * [IMPORTANT]
         * ====
         * You shouldn't rely on `isContract` to protect against flash loan attacks!
         *
         * Preventing calls from contracts is highly discouraged. It breaks composability, breaks support for smart wallets
         * like Gnosis Safe, and does not provide security since it can be circumvented by calling from a contract
         * constructor.
         * ====
         */
        function isContract(address account) internal view returns (bool) {
            // This method relies on extcodesize/address.code.length, which returns 0
            // for contracts in construction, since the code is only stored at the end
            // of the constructor execution.
    
            return account.code.length > 0;
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Replacement for Solidity's `transfer`: sends `amount` wei to
         * `recipient`, forwarding all available gas and reverting on errors.
         *
         * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-1884[EIP1884] increases the gas cost
         * of certain opcodes, possibly making contracts go over the 2300 gas limit
         * imposed by `transfer`, making them unable to receive funds via
         * `transfer`. {sendValue} removes this limitation.
         *
         * https://consensys.net/diligence/blog/2019/09/stop-using-soliditys-transfer-now/[Learn more].
         *
         * IMPORTANT: because control is transferred to `recipient`, care must be
         * taken to not create reentrancy vulnerabilities. Consider using
         * {ReentrancyGuard} or the
         * https://solidity.readthedocs.io/en/v0.8.0/security-considerations.html#use-the-checks-effects-interactions-pattern[checks-effects-interactions pattern].
         */
        function sendValue(address payable recipient, uint256 amount) internal {
            require(address(this).balance >= amount, "Address: insufficient balance");
    
            (bool success, ) = recipient.call{ value: amount }("");
            require(success, "Address: unable to send value, recipient may have reverted");
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Performs a Solidity function call using a low level `call`. A
         * plain `call` is an unsafe replacement for a function call: use this
         * function instead.
         *
         * If `target` reverts with a revert reason, it is bubbled up by this
         * function (like regular Solidity function calls).
         *
         * Returns the raw returned data. To convert to the expected return value,
         * use https://solidity.readthedocs.io/en/latest/units-and-global-variables.html?highlight=abi.decode#abi-encoding-and-decoding-functions[`abi.decode`].
         *
         * Requirements:
         *
         * - `target` must be a contract.
         * - calling `target` with `data` must not revert.
         *
         * _Available since v3.1._
         */
        function functionCall(address target, bytes memory data) internal returns (bytes memory) {
            return functionCallWithValue(target, data, 0, "Address: low-level call failed");
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`], but with
         * `errorMessage` as a fallback revert reason when `target` reverts.
         *
         * _Available since v3.1._
         */
        function functionCall(
            address target,
            bytes memory data,
            string memory errorMessage
        ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
            return functionCallWithValue(target, data, 0, errorMessage);
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`],
         * but also transferring `value` wei to `target`.
         *
         * Requirements:
         *
         * - the calling contract must have an ETH balance of at least `value`.
         * - the called Solidity function must be `payable`.
         *
         * _Available since v3.1._
         */
        function functionCallWithValue(address target, bytes memory data, uint256 value) internal returns (bytes memory) {
            return functionCallWithValue(target, data, value, "Address: low-level call with value failed");
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCallWithValue-address-bytes-uint256-}[`functionCallWithValue`], but
         * with `errorMessage` as a fallback revert reason when `target` reverts.
         *
         * _Available since v3.1._
         */
        function functionCallWithValue(
            address target,
            bytes memory data,
            uint256 value,
            string memory errorMessage
        ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
            require(address(this).balance >= value, "Address: insufficient balance for call");
            (bool success, bytes memory returndata) = target.call{ value: value }(data);
            return verifyCallResultFromTarget(target, success, returndata, errorMessage);
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`],
         * but performing a static call.
         *
         * _Available since v3.3._
         */
        function functionStaticCall(address target, bytes memory data) internal view returns (bytes memory) {
            return functionStaticCall(target, data, "Address: low-level static call failed");
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-string-}[`functionCall`],
         * but performing a static call.
         *
         * _Available since v3.3._
         */
        function functionStaticCall(
            address target,
            bytes memory data,
            string memory errorMessage
        ) internal view returns (bytes memory) {
            (bool success, bytes memory returndata) = target.staticcall(data);
            return verifyCallResultFromTarget(target, success, returndata, errorMessage);
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`],
         * but performing a delegate call.
         *
         * _Available since v3.4._
         */
        function functionDelegateCall(address target, bytes memory data) internal returns (bytes memory) {
            return functionDelegateCall(target, data, "Address: low-level delegate call failed");
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-string-}[`functionCall`],
         * but performing a delegate call.
         *
         * _Available since v3.4._
         */
        function functionDelegateCall(
            address target,
            bytes memory data,
            string memory errorMessage
        ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
            (bool success, bytes memory returndata) = target.delegatecall(data);
            return verifyCallResultFromTarget(target, success, returndata, errorMessage);
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Tool to verify that a low level call to smart-contract was successful, and revert (either by bubbling
         * the revert reason or using the provided one) in case of unsuccessful call or if target was not a contract.
         *
         * _Available since v4.8._
         */
        function verifyCallResultFromTarget(
            address target,
            bool success,
            bytes memory returndata,
            string memory errorMessage
        ) internal view returns (bytes memory) {
            if (success) {
                if (returndata.length == 0) {
                    // only check isContract if the call was successful and the return data is empty
                    // otherwise we already know that it was a contract
                    require(isContract(target), "Address: call to non-contract");
                }
                return returndata;
            } else {
                _revert(returndata, errorMessage);
            }
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Tool to verify that a low level call was successful, and revert if it wasn't, either by bubbling the
         * revert reason or using the provided one.
         *
         * _Available since v4.3._
         */
        function verifyCallResult(
            bool success,
            bytes memory returndata,
            string memory errorMessage
        ) internal pure returns (bytes memory) {
            if (success) {
                return returndata;
            } else {
                _revert(returndata, errorMessage);
            }
        }
    
        function _revert(bytes memory returndata, string memory errorMessage) private pure {
            // Look for revert reason and bubble it up if present
            if (returndata.length > 0) {
                // The easiest way to bubble the revert reason is using memory via assembly
                /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
                assembly {
                    let returndata_size := mload(returndata)
                    revert(add(32, returndata), returndata_size)
                }
            } else {
                revert(errorMessage);
            }
        }
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /// @author thirdweb
    
    // Helper interfaces
    import { IWETH } from "../infra/interface/IWETH.sol";
    import { SafeERC20, IERC20 } from "../external-deps/openzeppelin/token/ERC20/utils/SafeERC20.sol";
    
    library CurrencyTransferLib {
        using SafeERC20 for IERC20;
    
        error CurrencyTransferLibMismatchedValue(uint256 expected, uint256 actual);
        error CurrencyTransferLibFailedNativeTransfer(address recipient, uint256 value);
    
        /// @dev The address interpreted as native token of the chain.
        address public constant NATIVE_TOKEN = 0xEeeeeEeeeEeEeeEeEeEeeEEEeeeeEeeeeeeeEEeE;
    
        /// @dev Transfers a given amount of currency.
        function transferCurrency(address _currency, address _from, address _to, uint256 _amount) internal {
            if (_amount == 0) {
                return;
            }
    
            if (_currency == NATIVE_TOKEN) {
                safeTransferNativeToken(_to, _amount);
            } else {
                safeTransferERC20(_currency, _from, _to, _amount);
            }
        }
    
        /// @dev Transfers a given amount of currency. (With native token wrapping)
        function transferCurrencyWithWrapper(
            address _currency,
            address _from,
            address _to,
            uint256 _amount,
            address _nativeTokenWrapper
        ) internal {
            if (_amount == 0) {
                return;
            }
    
            if (_currency == NATIVE_TOKEN) {
                if (_from == address(this)) {
                    // withdraw from weth then transfer withdrawn native token to recipient
                    IWETH(_nativeTokenWrapper).withdraw(_amount);
                    safeTransferNativeTokenWithWrapper(_to, _amount, _nativeTokenWrapper);
                } else if (_to == address(this)) {
                    // store native currency in weth
                    if (_amount != msg.value) {
                        revert CurrencyTransferLibMismatchedValue(msg.value, _amount);
                    }
                    IWETH(_nativeTokenWrapper).deposit{ value: _amount }();
                } else {
                    safeTransferNativeTokenWithWrapper(_to, _amount, _nativeTokenWrapper);
                }
            } else {
                safeTransferERC20(_currency, _from, _to, _amount);
            }
        }
    
        /// @dev Transfer `amount` of ERC20 token from `from` to `to`.
        function safeTransferERC20(address _currency, address _from, address _to, uint256 _amount) internal {
            if (_from == _to) {
                return;
            }
    
            if (_from == address(this)) {
                IERC20(_currency).safeTransfer(_to, _amount);
            } else {
                IERC20(_currency).safeTransferFrom(_from, _to, _amount);
            }
        }
    
        /// @dev Transfers `amount` of native token to `to`.
        function safeTransferNativeToken(address to, uint256 value) internal {
            // solhint-disable avoid-low-level-calls
            // slither-disable-next-line low-level-calls
            (bool success, ) = to.call{ value: value }("");
            if (!success) {
                revert CurrencyTransferLibFailedNativeTransfer(to, value);
            }
        }
    
        /// @dev Transfers `amount` of native token to `to`. (With native token wrapping)
        function safeTransferNativeTokenWithWrapper(address to, uint256 value, address _nativeTokenWrapper) internal {
            // solhint-disable avoid-low-level-calls
            // slither-disable-next-line low-level-calls
            (bool success, ) = to.call{ value: value }("");
            if (!success) {
                IWETH(_nativeTokenWrapper).deposit{ value: value }();
                IERC20(_nativeTokenWrapper).safeTransfer(to, value);
            }
        }
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache 2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /// @author OpenZeppelin, thirdweb
    
    library MerkleProof {
        function verify(bytes32[] calldata proof, bytes32 root, bytes32 leaf) internal pure returns (bool, uint256) {
            bytes32 computedHash = leaf;
            uint256 index = 0;
    
            for (uint256 i = 0; i < proof.length; i++) {
                index *= 2;
                bytes32 proofElement = proof[i];
    
                if (computedHash <= proofElement) {
                    // Hash(current computed hash + current element of the proof)
                    computedHash = _efficientHash(computedHash, proofElement);
                } else {
                    // Hash(current element of the proof + current computed hash)
                    computedHash = _efficientHash(proofElement, computedHash);
                    index += 1;
                }
            }
    
            // Check if the computed hash (root) is equal to the provided root
            return (computedHash == root, index);
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Implementation of keccak256(abi.encode(a, b)) that doesn't allocate or expand memory.
         */
        function _efficientHash(bytes32 a, bytes32 b) private pure returns (bytes32 value) {
            /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
            assembly {
                mstore(0x00, a)
                mstore(0x20, b)
                value := keccak256(0x00, 0x40)
            }
        }
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /// @author thirdweb
    
    /**
     * @dev String operations.
     */
    library Strings {
        bytes16 private constant _HEX_SYMBOLS = "0123456789abcdef";
    
        /**
         * @dev Converts a `uint256` to its ASCII `string` decimal representation.
         */
        function toString(uint256 value) internal pure returns (string memory) {
            // Inspired by OraclizeAPI's implementation - MIT licence
            // https://github.com/oraclize/ethereum-api/blob/b42146b063c7d6ee1358846c198246239e9360e8/oraclizeAPI_0.4.25.sol
    
            if (value == 0) {
                return "0";
            }
            uint256 temp = value;
            uint256 digits;
            while (temp != 0) {
                digits++;
                temp /= 10;
            }
            bytes memory buffer = new bytes(digits);
            while (value != 0) {
                digits -= 1;
                buffer[digits] = bytes1(uint8(48 + uint256(value % 10)));
                value /= 10;
            }
            return string(buffer);
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Converts a `uint256` to its ASCII `string` hexadecimal representation.
         */
        function toHexString(uint256 value) internal pure returns (string memory) {
            if (value == 0) {
                return "0x00";
            }
            uint256 temp = value;
            uint256 length = 0;
            while (temp != 0) {
                length++;
                temp >>= 8;
            }
            return toHexString(value, length);
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Converts a `uint256` to its ASCII `string` hexadecimal representation with fixed length.
         */
        function toHexString(uint256 value, uint256 length) internal pure returns (string memory) {
            bytes memory buffer = new bytes(2 * length + 2);
            buffer[0] = "0";
            buffer[1] = "x";
            for (uint256 i = 2 * length + 1; i > 1; --i) {
                buffer[i] = _HEX_SYMBOLS[value & 0xf];
                value >>= 4;
            }
            require(value == 0, "Strings: hex length insufficient");
            return string(buffer);
        }
    
        /// @dev Returns the hexadecimal representation of `value`.
        /// The output is prefixed with "0x", encoded using 2 hexadecimal digits per byte,
        /// and the alphabets are capitalized conditionally according to
        /// https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-55
        function toHexStringChecksummed(address value) internal pure returns (string memory str) {
            str = toHexString(value);
            /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
            assembly {
                let mask := shl(6, div(not(0), 255)) // `0b010000000100000000 ...`
                let o := add(str, 0x22)
                let hashed := and(keccak256(o, 40), mul(34, mask)) // `0b10001000 ... `
                let t := shl(240, 136) // `0b10001000 << 240`
                for {
                    let i := 0
                } 1 {
    
                } {
                    mstore(add(i, i), mul(t, byte(i, hashed)))
                    i := add(i, 1)
                    if eq(i, 20) {
                        break
                    }
                }
                mstore(o, xor(mload(o), shr(1, and(mload(0x00), and(mload(o), mask)))))
                o := add(o, 0x20)
                mstore(o, xor(mload(o), shr(1, and(mload(0x20), and(mload(o), mask)))))
            }
        }
    
        /// @dev Returns the hexadecimal representation of `value`.
        /// The output is prefixed with "0x" and encoded using 2 hexadecimal digits per byte.
        function toHexString(address value) internal pure returns (string memory str) {
            str = toHexStringNoPrefix(value);
            /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
            assembly {
                let strLength := add(mload(str), 2) // Compute the length.
                mstore(str, 0x3078) // Write the "0x" prefix.
                str := sub(str, 2) // Move the pointer.
                mstore(str, strLength) // Write the length.
            }
        }
    
        /// @dev Returns the hexadecimal representation of `value`.
        /// The output is encoded using 2 hexadecimal digits per byte.
        function toHexStringNoPrefix(address value) internal pure returns (string memory str) {
            /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
            assembly {
                str := mload(0x40)
    
                // Allocate the memory.
                // We need 0x20 bytes for the trailing zeros padding, 0x20 bytes for the length,
                // 0x02 bytes for the prefix, and 0x28 bytes for the digits.
                // The next multiple of 0x20 above (0x20 + 0x20 + 0x02 + 0x28) is 0x80.
                mstore(0x40, add(str, 0x80))
    
                // Store "0123456789abcdef" in scratch space.
                mstore(0x0f, 0x30313233343536373839616263646566)
    
                str := add(str, 2)
                mstore(str, 40)
    
                let o := add(str, 0x20)
                mstore(add(o, 40), 0)
    
                value := shl(96, value)
    
                // We write the string from rightmost digit to leftmost digit.
                // The following is essentially a do-while loop that also handles the zero case.
                for {
                    let i := 0
                } 1 {
    
                } {
                    let p := add(o, add(i, i))
                    let temp := byte(i, value)
                    mstore8(add(p, 1), mload(and(temp, 15)))
                    mstore8(p, mload(shr(4, temp)))
                    i := add(i, 1)
                    if eq(i, 20) {
                        break
                    }
                }
            }
        }
    
        /// @dev Returns the hex encoded string from the raw bytes.
        /// The output is encoded using 2 hexadecimal digits per byte.
        function toHexString(bytes memory raw) internal pure returns (string memory str) {
            str = toHexStringNoPrefix(raw);
            /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
            assembly {
                let strLength := add(mload(str), 2) // Compute the length.
                mstore(str, 0x3078) // Write the "0x" prefix.
                str := sub(str, 2) // Move the pointer.
                mstore(str, strLength) // Write the length.
            }
        }
    
        /// @dev Returns the hex encoded string from the raw bytes.
        /// The output is encoded using 2 hexadecimal digits per byte.
        function toHexStringNoPrefix(bytes memory raw) internal pure returns (string memory str) {
            /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
            assembly {
                let length := mload(raw)
                str := add(mload(0x40), 2) // Skip 2 bytes for the optional prefix.
                mstore(str, add(length, length)) // Store the length of the output.
    
                // Store "0123456789abcdef" in scratch space.
                mstore(0x0f, 0x30313233343536373839616263646566)
    
                let o := add(str, 0x20)
                let end := add(raw, length)
    
                for {
    
                } iszero(eq(raw, end)) {
    
                } {
                    raw := add(raw, 1)
                    mstore8(add(o, 1), mload(and(mload(raw), 15)))
                    mstore8(o, mload(and(shr(4, mload(raw)), 15)))
                    o := add(o, 2)
                }
                mstore(o, 0) // Zeroize the slot after the string.
                mstore(0x40, add(o, 0x20)) // Allocate the memory.
            }
        }
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0
    pragma solidity ^0.8.11;
    
    /// @author thirdweb
    
    //   $$\     $$\       $$\                 $$\                         $$\
    //   $$ |    $$ |      \__|                $$ |                        $$ |
    // $$$$$$\   $$$$$$$\  $$\  $$$$$$\   $$$$$$$ |$$\  $$\  $$\  $$$$$$\  $$$$$$$\
    // \_$$  _|  $$  __$$\ $$ |$$  __$$\ $$  __$$ |$$ | $$ | $$ |$$  __$$\ $$  __$$\
    //   $$ |    $$ |  $$ |$$ |$$ |  \__|$$ /  $$ |$$ | $$ | $$ |$$$$$$$$ |$$ |  $$ |
    //   $$ |$$\ $$ |  $$ |$$ |$$ |      $$ |  $$ |$$ | $$ | $$ |$$   ____|$$ |  $$ |
    //   \$$$$  |$$ |  $$ |$$ |$$ |      \$$$$$$$ |\$$$$$\$$$$  |\$$$$$$$\ $$$$$$$  |
    //    \____/ \__|  \__|\__|\__|       \_______| \_____\____/  \_______|\_______/
    
    //  ==========  External imports    ==========
    
    import "../../extension/Multicall.sol";
    import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/utils/StringsUpgradeable.sol";
    import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/interfaces/IERC2981Upgradeable.sol";
    
    import "../../eip/ERC721AVirtualApproveUpgradeable.sol";
    
    //  ==========  Internal imports    ==========
    
    import "../../external-deps/openzeppelin/metatx/ERC2771ContextUpgradeable.sol";
    import "../../lib/CurrencyTransferLib.sol";
    
    //  ==========  Features    ==========
    
    import "../../extension/ContractMetadata.sol";
    import "../../extension/PlatformFee.sol";
    import "../../extension/Royalty.sol";
    import "../../extension/PrimarySale.sol";
    import "../../extension/Ownable.sol";
    import "../../extension/DelayedReveal.sol";
    import "../../extension/LazyMint.sol";
    import "../../extension/PermissionsEnumerable.sol";
    import "../../extension/Drop.sol";
    
    contract DropERC721 is
        Initializable,
        ContractMetadata,
        PlatformFee,
        Royalty,
        PrimarySale,
        Ownable,
        DelayedReveal,
        LazyMint,
        PermissionsEnumerable,
        Drop,
        ERC2771ContextUpgradeable,
        Multicall,
        ERC721AUpgradeable
    {
        using StringsUpgradeable for uint256;
    
        /*///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
                                State variables
        //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////*/
    
        /// @dev Only transfers to or from TRANSFER_ROLE holders are valid, when transfers are restricted.
        bytes32 private transferRole;
        /// @dev Only MINTER_ROLE holders can sign off on `MintRequest`s and lazy mint tokens.
        bytes32 private minterRole;
        /// @dev Only METADATA_ROLE holders can reveal the URI for a batch of delayed reveal NFTs, and update or freeze batch metadata.
        bytes32 private metadataRole;
    
        /// @dev Max bps in the thirdweb system.
        uint256 private constant MAX_BPS = 10_000;
    
        /// @dev Global max total supply of NFTs.
        uint256 public maxTotalSupply;
    
        /// @dev Emitted when the global max supply of tokens is updated.
        event MaxTotalSupplyUpdated(uint256 maxTotalSupply);
    
        /*///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
                        Constructor + initializer logic
        //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////*/
    
        constructor() initializer {}
    
        /// @dev Initializes the contract, like a constructor.
        function initialize(
            address _defaultAdmin,
            string memory _name,
            string memory _symbol,
            string memory _contractURI,
            address[] memory _trustedForwarders,
            address _saleRecipient,
            address _royaltyRecipient,
            uint128 _royaltyBps,
            uint128 _platformFeeBps,
            address _platformFeeRecipient
        ) external initializer {
            bytes32 _transferRole = keccak256("TRANSFER_ROLE");
            bytes32 _minterRole = keccak256("MINTER_ROLE");
            bytes32 _metadataRole = keccak256("METADATA_ROLE");
    
            // Initialize inherited contracts, most base-like -> most derived.
            __ERC2771Context_init(_trustedForwarders);
            __ERC721A_init(_name, _symbol);
    
            _setupContractURI(_contractURI);
            _setupOwner(_defaultAdmin);
    
            _setupRole(DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE, _defaultAdmin);
            _setupRole(_minterRole, _defaultAdmin);
            _setupRole(_transferRole, _defaultAdmin);
            _setupRole(_transferRole, address(0));
            _setupRole(_metadataRole, _defaultAdmin);
            _setRoleAdmin(_metadataRole, _metadataRole);
    
            _setupPlatformFeeInfo(_platformFeeRecipient, _platformFeeBps);
            _setupDefaultRoyaltyInfo(_royaltyRecipient, _royaltyBps);
            _setupPrimarySaleRecipient(_saleRecipient);
    
            transferRole = _transferRole;
            minterRole = _minterRole;
            metadataRole = _metadataRole;
        }
    
        /*///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
                            ERC 165 / 721 / 2981 logic
        //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////*/
    
        /// @dev Returns the URI for a given tokenId.
        function tokenURI(uint256 _tokenId) public view override returns (string memory) {
            (uint256 batchId, ) = _getBatchId(_tokenId);
            string memory batchUri = _getBaseURI(_tokenId);
    
            if (isEncryptedBatch(batchId)) {
                return string(abi.encodePacked(batchUri, "0"));
            } else {
                return string(abi.encodePacked(batchUri, _tokenId.toString()));
            }
        }
    
        /// @dev See ERC 165
        function supportsInterface(
            bytes4 interfaceId
        ) public view virtual override(ERC721AUpgradeable, IERC165) returns (bool) {
            return super.supportsInterface(interfaceId) || type(IERC2981Upgradeable).interfaceId == interfaceId;
        }
    
        /*///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
                            Contract identifiers
        //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////*/
    
        function contractType() external pure returns (bytes32) {
            return bytes32("DropERC721");
        }
    
        function contractVersion() external pure returns (uint8) {
            return uint8(4);
        }
    
        /*///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
                        Lazy minting + delayed-reveal logic
        //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////*/
    
        /**
         *  @dev Lets an account with `MINTER_ROLE` lazy mint 'n' NFTs.
         *       The URIs for each token is the provided `_baseURIForTokens` + `{tokenId}`.
         */
        function lazyMint(
            uint256 _amount,
            string calldata _baseURIForTokens,
            bytes calldata _data
        ) public override returns (uint256 batchId) {
            if (_data.length > 0) {
                (bytes memory encryptedURI, bytes32 provenanceHash) = abi.decode(_data, (bytes, bytes32));
                if (encryptedURI.length != 0 && provenanceHash != "") {
                    _setEncryptedData(nextTokenIdToLazyMint + _amount, _data);
                }
            }
    
            return super.lazyMint(_amount, _baseURIForTokens, _data);
        }
    
        /// @dev Lets an account with `METADATA_ROLE` reveal the URI for a batch of 'delayed-reveal' NFTs.
        /// @param _index the ID of a token with the desired batch.
        /// @param _key the key to decrypt the batch's URI.
        function reveal(
            uint256 _index,
            bytes calldata _key
        ) external onlyRole(metadataRole) returns (string memory revealedURI) {
            uint256 batchId = getBatchIdAtIndex(_index);
            revealedURI = getRevealURI(batchId, _key);
    
            _setEncryptedData(batchId, "");
            _setBaseURI(batchId, revealedURI);
    
            emit TokenURIRevealed(_index, revealedURI);
        }
    
        /**
         * @notice Updates the base URI for a batch of tokens. Can only be called if the batch has been revealed/is not encrypted.
         *
         * @param _index Index of the desired batch in batchIds array
         * @param _uri   the new base URI for the batch.
         */
        function updateBatchBaseURI(uint256 _index, string calldata _uri) external onlyRole(metadataRole) {
            require(!isEncryptedBatch(getBatchIdAtIndex(_index)), "Encrypted batch");
            uint256 batchId = getBatchIdAtIndex(_index);
            _setBaseURI(batchId, _uri);
        }
    
        /**
         * @notice Freezes the base URI for a batch of tokens.
         *
         * @param _index Index of the desired batch in batchIds array.
         */
        function freezeBatchBaseURI(uint256 _index) external onlyRole(metadataRole) {
            require(!isEncryptedBatch(getBatchIdAtIndex(_index)), "Encrypted batch");
            uint256 batchId = getBatchIdAtIndex(_index);
            _freezeBaseURI(batchId);
        }
    
        /*///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
                            Setter functions
        //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////*/
    
        /// @dev Lets a contract admin set the global maximum supply for collection's NFTs.
        function setMaxTotalSupply(uint256 _maxTotalSupply) external onlyRole(DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE) {
            maxTotalSupply = _maxTotalSupply;
            emit MaxTotalSupplyUpdated(_maxTotalSupply);
        }
    
        /*///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
                            Internal functions
        //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////*/
    
        /// @dev Runs before every `claim` function call.
        function _beforeClaim(
            address,
            uint256 _quantity,
            address,
            uint256,
            AllowlistProof calldata,
            bytes memory
        ) internal view override {
            require(_currentIndex + _quantity <= nextTokenIdToLazyMint, "!Tokens");
            require(maxTotalSupply == 0 || _currentIndex + _quantity <= maxTotalSupply, "!Supply");
        }
    
        /// @dev Collects and distributes the primary sale value of NFTs being claimed.
        function _collectPriceOnClaim(
            address _primarySaleRecipient,
            uint256 _quantityToClaim,
            address _currency,
            uint256 _pricePerToken
        ) internal override {
            if (_pricePerToken == 0) {
                require(msg.value == 0, "!V");
                return;
            }
    
            (address platformFeeRecipient, uint16 platformFeeBps) = getPlatformFeeInfo();
    
            address saleRecipient = _primarySaleRecipient == address(0) ? primarySaleRecipient() : _primarySaleRecipient;
    
            uint256 totalPrice = _quantityToClaim * _pricePerToken;
            uint256 platformFees = (totalPrice * platformFeeBps) / MAX_BPS;
    
            bool validMsgValue;
            if (_currency == CurrencyTransferLib.NATIVE_TOKEN) {
                validMsgValue = msg.value == totalPrice;
            } else {
                validMsgValue = msg.value == 0;
            }
            require(validMsgValue, "!V");
    
            CurrencyTransferLib.transferCurrency(_currency, _msgSender(), platformFeeRecipient, platformFees);
            CurrencyTransferLib.transferCurrency(_currency, _msgSender(), saleRecipient, totalPrice - platformFees);
        }
    
        /// @dev Transfers the NFTs being claimed.
        function _transferTokensOnClaim(
            address _to,
            uint256 _quantityBeingClaimed
        ) internal override returns (uint256 startTokenId) {
            startTokenId = _currentIndex;
            _safeMint(_to, _quantityBeingClaimed);
        }
    
        /// @dev Checks whether platform fee info can be set in the given execution context.
        function _canSetPlatformFeeInfo() internal view override returns (bool) {
            return hasRole(DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE, _msgSender());
        }
    
        /// @dev Checks whether primary sale recipient can be set in the given execution context.
        function _canSetPrimarySaleRecipient() internal view override returns (bool) {
            return hasRole(DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE, _msgSender());
        }
    
        /// @dev Checks whether owner can be set in the given execution context.
        function _canSetOwner() internal view override returns (bool) {
            return hasRole(DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE, _msgSender());
        }
    
        /// @dev Checks whether royalty info can be set in the given execution context.
        function _canSetRoyaltyInfo() internal view override returns (bool) {
            return hasRole(DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE, _msgSender());
        }
    
        /// @dev Checks whether contract metadata can be set in the given execution context.
        function _canSetContractURI() internal view override returns (bool) {
            return hasRole(DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE, _msgSender());
        }
    
        /// @dev Checks whether platform fee info can be set in the given execution context.
        function _canSetClaimConditions() internal view override returns (bool) {
            return hasRole(DEFAULT_ADMIN_ROLE, _msgSender());
        }
    
        /// @dev Returns whether lazy minting can be done in the given execution context.
        function _canLazyMint() internal view virtual override returns (bool) {
            return hasRole(minterRole, _msgSender());
        }
    
        /*///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
                            Miscellaneous
        //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////*/
    
        /**
         * Returns the total amount of tokens minted in the contract.
         */
        function totalMinted() external view returns (uint256) {
            return _totalMinted();
        }
    
        /// @dev The tokenId of the next NFT that will be minted / lazy minted.
        function nextTokenIdToMint() external view returns (uint256) {
            return nextTokenIdToLazyMint;
        }
    
        /// @dev The next token ID of the NFT that can be claimed.
        function nextTokenIdToClaim() external view returns (uint256) {
            return _currentIndex;
        }
    
        /// @dev Burns `tokenId`. See {ERC721-_burn}.
        function burn(uint256 tokenId) external virtual {
            // note: ERC721AUpgradeable's `_burn(uint256,bool)` internally checks for token approvals.
            _burn(tokenId, true);
        }
    
        /// @dev See {ERC721-_beforeTokenTransfer}.
        function _beforeTokenTransfers(
            address from,
            address to,
            uint256 startTokenId,
            uint256 quantity
        ) internal virtual override {
            super._beforeTokenTransfers(from, to, startTokenId, quantity);
    
            // if transfer is restricted on the contract, we still want to allow burning and minting
            if (!hasRole(transferRole, address(0)) && from != address(0) && to != address(0)) {
                if (!hasRole(transferRole, from) && !hasRole(transferRole, to)) {
                    revert("!Transfer-Role");
                }
            }
        }
    
        function _dropMsgSender() internal view virtual override returns (address) {
            return _msgSender();
        }
    
        function _msgSender()
            internal
            view
            virtual
            override(ContextUpgradeable, ERC2771ContextUpgradeable, Multicall)
            returns (address sender)
        {
            return ERC2771ContextUpgradeable._msgSender();
        }
    
        function _msgData()
            internal
            view
            virtual
            override(ContextUpgradeable, ERC2771ContextUpgradeable)
            returns (bytes calldata)
        {
            return ERC2771ContextUpgradeable._msgData();
        }
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
    // ERC721A Contracts v3.3.0
    // Creator: Chiru Labs
    
    pragma solidity ^0.8.4;
    
    import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/token/ERC721/IERC721Upgradeable.sol";
    import "@openzeppelin/contracts-upgradeable/token/ERC721/extensions/IERC721MetadataUpgradeable.sol";
    
    /**
     * @dev Interface of an ERC721A compliant contract.
     */
    interface IERC721AUpgradeable is IERC721Upgradeable, IERC721MetadataUpgradeable {
        /**
         * The caller must own the token or be an approved operator.
         */
        error ApprovalCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();
    
        /**
         * The token does not exist.
         */
        error ApprovalQueryForNonexistentToken();
    
        /**
         * The caller cannot approve to their own address.
         */
        error ApproveToCaller();
    
        /**
         * The caller cannot approve to the current owner.
         */
        error ApprovalToCurrentOwner();
    
        /**
         * Cannot query the balance for the zero address.
         */
        error BalanceQueryForZeroAddress();
    
        /**
         * Cannot mint to the zero address.
         */
        error MintToZeroAddress();
    
        /**
         * The quantity of tokens minted must be more than zero.
         */
        error MintZeroQuantity();
    
        /**
         * The token does not exist.
         */
        error OwnerQueryForNonexistentToken();
    
        /**
         * The caller must own the token or be an approved operator.
         */
        error TransferCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();
    
        /**
         * The token must be owned by `from`.
         */
        error TransferFromIncorrectOwner();
    
        /**
         * Cannot safely transfer to a contract that does not implement the ERC721Receiver interface.
         */
        error TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer();
    
        /**
         * Cannot transfer to the zero address.
         */
        error TransferToZeroAddress();
    
        /**
         * The token does not exist.
         */
        error URIQueryForNonexistentToken();
    
        // Compiler will pack this into a single 256bit word.
        struct TokenOwnership {
            // The address of the owner.
            address addr;
            // Keeps track of the start time of ownership with minimal overhead for tokenomics.
            uint64 startTimestamp;
            // Whether the token has been burned.
            bool burned;
        }
    
        // Compiler will pack this into a single 256bit word.
        struct AddressData {
            // Realistically, 2**64-1 is more than enough.
            uint64 balance;
            // Keeps track of mint count with minimal overhead for tokenomics.
            uint64 numberMinted;
            // Keeps track of burn count with minimal overhead for tokenomics.
            uint64 numberBurned;
            // For miscellaneous variable(s) pertaining to the address
            // (e.g. number of whitelist mint slots used).
            // If there are multiple variables, please pack them into a uint64.
            uint64 aux;
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Returns the total amount of tokens stored by the contract.
         * 
         * Burned tokens are calculated here, use `_totalMinted()` if you want to count just minted tokens.
         */
        function totalSupply() external view returns (uint256);
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
    // OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.9.0) (interfaces/IERC2981.sol)
    
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    import "../utils/introspection/IERC165Upgradeable.sol";
    
    /**
     * @dev Interface for the NFT Royalty Standard.
     *
     * A standardized way to retrieve royalty payment information for non-fungible tokens (NFTs) to enable universal
     * support for royalty payments across all NFT marketplaces and ecosystem participants.
     *
     * _Available since v4.5._
     */
    interface IERC2981Upgradeable is IERC165Upgradeable {
        /**
         * @dev Returns how much royalty is owed and to whom, based on a sale price that may be denominated in any unit of
         * exchange. The royalty amount is denominated and should be paid in that same unit of exchange.
         */
        function royaltyInfo(
            uint256 tokenId,
            uint256 salePrice
        ) external view returns (address receiver, uint256 royaltyAmount);
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
    // OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.9.0) (proxy/utils/Initializable.sol)
    
    pragma solidity ^0.8.2;
    
    import "../../utils/AddressUpgradeable.sol";
    
    /**
     * @dev This is a base contract to aid in writing upgradeable contracts, or any kind of contract that will be deployed
     * behind a proxy. Since proxied contracts do not make use of a constructor, it's common to move constructor logic to an
     * external initializer function, usually called `initialize`. It then becomes necessary to protect this initializer
     * function so it can only be called once. The {initializer} modifier provided by this contract will have this effect.
     *
     * The initialization functions use a version number. Once a version number is used, it is consumed and cannot be
     * reused. This mechanism prevents re-execution of each "step" but allows the creation of new initialization steps in
     * case an upgrade adds a module that needs to be initialized.
     *
     * For example:
     *
     * [.hljs-theme-light.nopadding]
     * ```solidity
     * contract MyToken is ERC20Upgradeable {
     *     function initialize() initializer public {
     *         __ERC20_init("MyToken", "MTK");
     *     }
     * }
     *
     * contract MyTokenV2 is MyToken, ERC20PermitUpgradeable {
     *     function initializeV2() reinitializer(2) public {
     *         __ERC20Permit_init("MyToken");
     *     }
     * }
     * ```
     *
     * TIP: To avoid leaving the proxy in an uninitialized state, the initializer function should be called as early as
     * possible by providing the encoded function call as the `_data` argument to {ERC1967Proxy-constructor}.
     *
     * CAUTION: When used with inheritance, manual care must be taken to not invoke a parent initializer twice, or to ensure
     * that all initializers are idempotent. This is not verified automatically as constructors are by Solidity.
     *
     * [CAUTION]
     * ====
     * Avoid leaving a contract uninitialized.
     *
     * An uninitialized contract can be taken over by an attacker. This applies to both a proxy and its implementation
     * contract, which may impact the proxy. To prevent the implementation contract from being used, you should invoke
     * the {_disableInitializers} function in the constructor to automatically lock it when it is deployed:
     *
     * [.hljs-theme-light.nopadding]
     * ```
     * /// @custom:oz-upgrades-unsafe-allow constructor
     * constructor() {
     *     _disableInitializers();
     * }
     * ```
     * ====
     */
    abstract contract Initializable {
        /**
         * @dev Indicates that the contract has been initialized.
         * @custom:oz-retyped-from bool
         */
        uint8 private _initialized;
    
        /**
         * @dev Indicates that the contract is in the process of being initialized.
         */
        bool private _initializing;
    
        /**
         * @dev Triggered when the contract has been initialized or reinitialized.
         */
        event Initialized(uint8 version);
    
        /**
         * @dev A modifier that defines a protected initializer function that can be invoked at most once. In its scope,
         * `onlyInitializing` functions can be used to initialize parent contracts.
         *
         * Similar to `reinitializer(1)`, except that functions marked with `initializer` can be nested in the context of a
         * constructor.
         *
         * Emits an {Initialized} event.
         */
        modifier initializer() {
            bool isTopLevelCall = !_initializing;
            require(
                (isTopLevelCall && _initialized < 1) || (!AddressUpgradeable.isContract(address(this)) && _initialized == 1),
                "Initializable: contract is already initialized"
            );
            _initialized = 1;
            if (isTopLevelCall) {
                _initializing = true;
            }
            _;
            if (isTopLevelCall) {
                _initializing = false;
                emit Initialized(1);
            }
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev A modifier that defines a protected reinitializer function that can be invoked at most once, and only if the
         * contract hasn't been initialized to a greater version before. In its scope, `onlyInitializing` functions can be
         * used to initialize parent contracts.
         *
         * A reinitializer may be used after the original initialization step. This is essential to configure modules that
         * are added through upgrades and that require initialization.
         *
         * When `version` is 1, this modifier is similar to `initializer`, except that functions marked with `reinitializer`
         * cannot be nested. If one is invoked in the context of another, execution will revert.
         *
         * Note that versions can jump in increments greater than 1; this implies that if multiple reinitializers coexist in
         * a contract, executing them in the right order is up to the developer or operator.
         *
         * WARNING: setting the version to 255 will prevent any future reinitialization.
         *
         * Emits an {Initialized} event.
         */
        modifier reinitializer(uint8 version) {
            require(!_initializing && _initialized < version, "Initializable: contract is already initialized");
            _initialized = version;
            _initializing = true;
            _;
            _initializing = false;
            emit Initialized(version);
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Modifier to protect an initialization function so that it can only be invoked by functions with the
         * {initializer} and {reinitializer} modifiers, directly or indirectly.
         */
        modifier onlyInitializing() {
            require(_initializing, "Initializable: contract is not initializing");
            _;
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Locks the contract, preventing any future reinitialization. This cannot be part of an initializer call.
         * Calling this in the constructor of a contract will prevent that contract from being initialized or reinitialized
         * to any version. It is recommended to use this to lock implementation contracts that are designed to be called
         * through proxies.
         *
         * Emits an {Initialized} event the first time it is successfully executed.
         */
        function _disableInitializers() internal virtual {
            require(!_initializing, "Initializable: contract is initializing");
            if (_initialized != type(uint8).max) {
                _initialized = type(uint8).max;
                emit Initialized(type(uint8).max);
            }
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Returns the highest version that has been initialized. See {reinitializer}.
         */
        function _getInitializedVersion() internal view returns (uint8) {
            return _initialized;
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Returns `true` if the contract is currently initializing. See {onlyInitializing}.
         */
        function _isInitializing() internal view returns (bool) {
            return _initializing;
        }
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
    // OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.6.0) (token/ERC721/IERC721Receiver.sol)
    
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /**
     * @title ERC721 token receiver interface
     * @dev Interface for any contract that wants to support safeTransfers
     * from ERC721 asset contracts.
     */
    interface IERC721ReceiverUpgradeable {
        /**
         * @dev Whenever an {IERC721} `tokenId` token is transferred to this contract via {IERC721-safeTransferFrom}
         * by `operator` from `from`, this function is called.
         *
         * It must return its Solidity selector to confirm the token transfer.
         * If any other value is returned or the interface is not implemented by the recipient, the transfer will be reverted.
         *
         * The selector can be obtained in Solidity with `IERC721Receiver.onERC721Received.selector`.
         */
        function onERC721Received(
            address operator,
            address from,
            uint256 tokenId,
            bytes calldata data
        ) external returns (bytes4);
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
    // OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.9.0) (token/ERC721/IERC721.sol)
    
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    import "../../utils/introspection/IERC165Upgradeable.sol";
    
    /**
     * @dev Required interface of an ERC721 compliant contract.
     */
    interface IERC721Upgradeable is IERC165Upgradeable {
        /**
         * @dev Emitted when `tokenId` token is transferred from `from` to `to`.
         */
        event Transfer(address indexed from, address indexed to, uint256 indexed tokenId);
    
        /**
         * @dev Emitted when `owner` enables `approved` to manage the `tokenId` token.
         */
        event Approval(address indexed owner, address indexed approved, uint256 indexed tokenId);
    
        /**
         * @dev Emitted when `owner` enables or disables (`approved`) `operator` to manage all of its assets.
         */
        event ApprovalForAll(address indexed owner, address indexed operator, bool approved);
    
        /**
         * @dev Returns the number of tokens in ``owner``'s account.
         */
        function balanceOf(address owner) external view returns (uint256 balance);
    
        /**
         * @dev Returns the owner of the `tokenId` token.
         *
         * Requirements:
         *
         * - `tokenId` must exist.
         */
        function ownerOf(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (address owner);
    
        /**
         * @dev Safely transfers `tokenId` token from `from` to `to`.
         *
         * Requirements:
         *
         * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
         * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
         * - `tokenId` token must exist and be owned by `from`.
         * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be approved to move this token by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
         * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received}, which is called upon a safe transfer.
         *
         * Emits a {Transfer} event.
         */
        function safeTransferFrom(address from, address to, uint256 tokenId, bytes calldata data) external;
    
        /**
         * @dev Safely transfers `tokenId` token from `from` to `to`, checking first that contract recipients
         * are aware of the ERC721 protocol to prevent tokens from being forever locked.
         *
         * Requirements:
         *
         * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
         * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
         * - `tokenId` token must exist and be owned by `from`.
         * - If the caller is not `from`, it must have been allowed to move this token by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
         * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received}, which is called upon a safe transfer.
         *
         * Emits a {Transfer} event.
         */
        function safeTransferFrom(address from, address to, uint256 tokenId) external;
    
        /**
         * @dev Transfers `tokenId` token from `from` to `to`.
         *
         * WARNING: Note that the caller is responsible to confirm that the recipient is capable of receiving ERC721
         * or else they may be permanently lost. Usage of {safeTransferFrom} prevents loss, though the caller must
         * understand this adds an external call which potentially creates a reentrancy vulnerability.
         *
         * Requirements:
         *
         * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
         * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
         * - `tokenId` token must be owned by `from`.
         * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be approved to move this token by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
         *
         * Emits a {Transfer} event.
         */
        function transferFrom(address from, address to, uint256 tokenId) external;
    
        /**
         * @dev Gives permission to `to` to transfer `tokenId` token to another account.
         * The approval is cleared when the token is transferred.
         *
         * Only a single account can be approved at a time, so approving the zero address clears previous approvals.
         *
         * Requirements:
         *
         * - The caller must own the token or be an approved operator.
         * - `tokenId` must exist.
         *
         * Emits an {Approval} event.
         */
        function approve(address to, uint256 tokenId) external;
    
        /**
         * @dev Approve or remove `operator` as an operator for the caller.
         * Operators can call {transferFrom} or {safeTransferFrom} for any token owned by the caller.
         *
         * Requirements:
         *
         * - The `operator` cannot be the caller.
         *
         * Emits an {ApprovalForAll} event.
         */
        function setApprovalForAll(address operator, bool approved) external;
    
        /**
         * @dev Returns the account approved for `tokenId` token.
         *
         * Requirements:
         *
         * - `tokenId` must exist.
         */
        function getApproved(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (address operator);
    
        /**
         * @dev Returns if the `operator` is allowed to manage all of the assets of `owner`.
         *
         * See {setApprovalForAll}
         */
        function isApprovedForAll(address owner, address operator) external view returns (bool);
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
    // OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (token/ERC721/extensions/IERC721Metadata.sol)
    
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    import "../IERC721Upgradeable.sol";
    
    /**
     * @title ERC-721 Non-Fungible Token Standard, optional metadata extension
     * @dev See https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-721
     */
    interface IERC721MetadataUpgradeable is IERC721Upgradeable {
        /**
         * @dev Returns the token collection name.
         */
        function name() external view returns (string memory);
    
        /**
         * @dev Returns the token collection symbol.
         */
        function symbol() external view returns (string memory);
    
        /**
         * @dev Returns the Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) for `tokenId` token.
         */
        function tokenURI(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (string memory);
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
    // OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.9.0) (utils/Address.sol)
    
    pragma solidity ^0.8.1;
    
    /**
     * @dev Collection of functions related to the address type
     */
    library AddressUpgradeable {
        /**
         * @dev Returns true if `account` is a contract.
         *
         * [IMPORTANT]
         * ====
         * It is unsafe to assume that an address for which this function returns
         * false is an externally-owned account (EOA) and not a contract.
         *
         * Among others, `isContract` will return false for the following
         * types of addresses:
         *
         *  - an externally-owned account
         *  - a contract in construction
         *  - an address where a contract will be created
         *  - an address where a contract lived, but was destroyed
         *
         * Furthermore, `isContract` will also return true if the target contract within
         * the same transaction is already scheduled for destruction by `SELFDESTRUCT`,
         * which only has an effect at the end of a transaction.
         * ====
         *
         * [IMPORTANT]
         * ====
         * You shouldn't rely on `isContract` to protect against flash loan attacks!
         *
         * Preventing calls from contracts is highly discouraged. It breaks composability, breaks support for smart wallets
         * like Gnosis Safe, and does not provide security since it can be circumvented by calling from a contract
         * constructor.
         * ====
         */
        function isContract(address account) internal view returns (bool) {
            // This method relies on extcodesize/address.code.length, which returns 0
            // for contracts in construction, since the code is only stored at the end
            // of the constructor execution.
    
            return account.code.length > 0;
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Replacement for Solidity's `transfer`: sends `amount` wei to
         * `recipient`, forwarding all available gas and reverting on errors.
         *
         * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-1884[EIP1884] increases the gas cost
         * of certain opcodes, possibly making contracts go over the 2300 gas limit
         * imposed by `transfer`, making them unable to receive funds via
         * `transfer`. {sendValue} removes this limitation.
         *
         * https://consensys.net/diligence/blog/2019/09/stop-using-soliditys-transfer-now/[Learn more].
         *
         * IMPORTANT: because control is transferred to `recipient`, care must be
         * taken to not create reentrancy vulnerabilities. Consider using
         * {ReentrancyGuard} or the
         * https://solidity.readthedocs.io/en/v0.8.0/security-considerations.html#use-the-checks-effects-interactions-pattern[checks-effects-interactions pattern].
         */
        function sendValue(address payable recipient, uint256 amount) internal {
            require(address(this).balance >= amount, "Address: insufficient balance");
    
            (bool success, ) = recipient.call{value: amount}("");
            require(success, "Address: unable to send value, recipient may have reverted");
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Performs a Solidity function call using a low level `call`. A
         * plain `call` is an unsafe replacement for a function call: use this
         * function instead.
         *
         * If `target` reverts with a revert reason, it is bubbled up by this
         * function (like regular Solidity function calls).
         *
         * Returns the raw returned data. To convert to the expected return value,
         * use https://solidity.readthedocs.io/en/latest/units-and-global-variables.html?highlight=abi.decode#abi-encoding-and-decoding-functions[`abi.decode`].
         *
         * Requirements:
         *
         * - `target` must be a contract.
         * - calling `target` with `data` must not revert.
         *
         * _Available since v3.1._
         */
        function functionCall(address target, bytes memory data) internal returns (bytes memory) {
            return functionCallWithValue(target, data, 0, "Address: low-level call failed");
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`], but with
         * `errorMessage` as a fallback revert reason when `target` reverts.
         *
         * _Available since v3.1._
         */
        function functionCall(
            address target,
            bytes memory data,
            string memory errorMessage
        ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
            return functionCallWithValue(target, data, 0, errorMessage);
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`],
         * but also transferring `value` wei to `target`.
         *
         * Requirements:
         *
         * - the calling contract must have an ETH balance of at least `value`.
         * - the called Solidity function must be `payable`.
         *
         * _Available since v3.1._
         */
        function functionCallWithValue(address target, bytes memory data, uint256 value) internal returns (bytes memory) {
            return functionCallWithValue(target, data, value, "Address: low-level call with value failed");
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCallWithValue-address-bytes-uint256-}[`functionCallWithValue`], but
         * with `errorMessage` as a fallback revert reason when `target` reverts.
         *
         * _Available since v3.1._
         */
        function functionCallWithValue(
            address target,
            bytes memory data,
            uint256 value,
            string memory errorMessage
        ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
            require(address(this).balance >= value, "Address: insufficient balance for call");
            (bool success, bytes memory returndata) = target.call{value: value}(data);
            return verifyCallResultFromTarget(target, success, returndata, errorMessage);
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`],
         * but performing a static call.
         *
         * _Available since v3.3._
         */
        function functionStaticCall(address target, bytes memory data) internal view returns (bytes memory) {
            return functionStaticCall(target, data, "Address: low-level static call failed");
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-string-}[`functionCall`],
         * but performing a static call.
         *
         * _Available since v3.3._
         */
        function functionStaticCall(
            address target,
            bytes memory data,
            string memory errorMessage
        ) internal view returns (bytes memory) {
            (bool success, bytes memory returndata) = target.staticcall(data);
            return verifyCallResultFromTarget(target, success, returndata, errorMessage);
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`],
         * but performing a delegate call.
         *
         * _Available since v3.4._
         */
        function functionDelegateCall(address target, bytes memory data) internal returns (bytes memory) {
            return functionDelegateCall(target, data, "Address: low-level delegate call failed");
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-string-}[`functionCall`],
         * but performing a delegate call.
         *
         * _Available since v3.4._
         */
        function functionDelegateCall(
            address target,
            bytes memory data,
            string memory errorMessage
        ) internal returns (bytes memory) {
            (bool success, bytes memory returndata) = target.delegatecall(data);
            return verifyCallResultFromTarget(target, success, returndata, errorMessage);
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Tool to verify that a low level call to smart-contract was successful, and revert (either by bubbling
         * the revert reason or using the provided one) in case of unsuccessful call or if target was not a contract.
         *
         * _Available since v4.8._
         */
        function verifyCallResultFromTarget(
            address target,
            bool success,
            bytes memory returndata,
            string memory errorMessage
        ) internal view returns (bytes memory) {
            if (success) {
                if (returndata.length == 0) {
                    // only check isContract if the call was successful and the return data is empty
                    // otherwise we already know that it was a contract
                    require(isContract(target), "Address: call to non-contract");
                }
                return returndata;
            } else {
                _revert(returndata, errorMessage);
            }
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Tool to verify that a low level call was successful, and revert if it wasn't, either by bubbling the
         * revert reason or using the provided one.
         *
         * _Available since v4.3._
         */
        function verifyCallResult(
            bool success,
            bytes memory returndata,
            string memory errorMessage
        ) internal pure returns (bytes memory) {
            if (success) {
                return returndata;
            } else {
                _revert(returndata, errorMessage);
            }
        }
    
        function _revert(bytes memory returndata, string memory errorMessage) private pure {
            // Look for revert reason and bubble it up if present
            if (returndata.length > 0) {
                // The easiest way to bubble the revert reason is using memory via assembly
                /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
                assembly {
                    let returndata_size := mload(returndata)
                    revert(add(32, returndata), returndata_size)
                }
            } else {
                revert(errorMessage);
            }
        }
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
    // OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (utils/Context.sol)
    
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    import "../proxy/utils/Initializable.sol";
    
    /**
     * @dev Provides information about the current execution context, including the
     * sender of the transaction and its data. While these are generally available
     * via msg.sender and msg.data, they should not be accessed in such a direct
     * manner, since when dealing with meta-transactions the account sending and
     * paying for execution may not be the actual sender (as far as an application
     * is concerned).
     *
     * This contract is only required for intermediate, library-like contracts.
     */
    abstract contract ContextUpgradeable is Initializable {
        function __Context_init() internal onlyInitializing {
        }
    
        function __Context_init_unchained() internal onlyInitializing {
        }
        function _msgSender() internal view virtual returns (address) {
            return msg.sender;
        }
    
        function _msgData() internal view virtual returns (bytes calldata) {
            return msg.data;
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev This empty reserved space is put in place to allow future versions to add new
         * variables without shifting down storage in the inheritance chain.
         * See https://docs.openzeppelin.com/contracts/4.x/upgradeable#storage_gaps
         */
        uint256[50] private __gap;
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
    // OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.9.0) (utils/Strings.sol)
    
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    import "./math/MathUpgradeable.sol";
    import "./math/SignedMathUpgradeable.sol";
    
    /**
     * @dev String operations.
     */
    library StringsUpgradeable {
        bytes16 private constant _SYMBOLS = "0123456789abcdef";
        uint8 private constant _ADDRESS_LENGTH = 20;
    
        /**
         * @dev Converts a `uint256` to its ASCII `string` decimal representation.
         */
        function toString(uint256 value) internal pure returns (string memory) {
            unchecked {
                uint256 length = MathUpgradeable.log10(value) + 1;
                string memory buffer = new string(length);
                uint256 ptr;
                /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
                assembly {
                    ptr := add(buffer, add(32, length))
                }
                while (true) {
                    ptr--;
                    /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
                    assembly {
                        mstore8(ptr, byte(mod(value, 10), _SYMBOLS))
                    }
                    value /= 10;
                    if (value == 0) break;
                }
                return buffer;
            }
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Converts a `int256` to its ASCII `string` decimal representation.
         */
        function toString(int256 value) internal pure returns (string memory) {
            return string(abi.encodePacked(value < 0 ? "-" : "", toString(SignedMathUpgradeable.abs(value))));
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Converts a `uint256` to its ASCII `string` hexadecimal representation.
         */
        function toHexString(uint256 value) internal pure returns (string memory) {
            unchecked {
                return toHexString(value, MathUpgradeable.log256(value) + 1);
            }
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Converts a `uint256` to its ASCII `string` hexadecimal representation with fixed length.
         */
        function toHexString(uint256 value, uint256 length) internal pure returns (string memory) {
            bytes memory buffer = new bytes(2 * length + 2);
            buffer[0] = "0";
            buffer[1] = "x";
            for (uint256 i = 2 * length + 1; i > 1; --i) {
                buffer[i] = _SYMBOLS[value & 0xf];
                value >>= 4;
            }
            require(value == 0, "Strings: hex length insufficient");
            return string(buffer);
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Converts an `address` with fixed length of 20 bytes to its not checksummed ASCII `string` hexadecimal representation.
         */
        function toHexString(address addr) internal pure returns (string memory) {
            return toHexString(uint256(uint160(addr)), _ADDRESS_LENGTH);
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Returns true if the two strings are equal.
         */
        function equal(string memory a, string memory b) internal pure returns (bool) {
            return keccak256(bytes(a)) == keccak256(bytes(b));
        }
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
    // OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (utils/introspection/ERC165.sol)
    
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    import "./IERC165Upgradeable.sol";
    import "../../proxy/utils/Initializable.sol";
    
    /**
     * @dev Implementation of the {IERC165} interface.
     *
     * Contracts that want to implement ERC165 should inherit from this contract and override {supportsInterface} to check
     * for the additional interface id that will be supported. For example:
     *
     * ```solidity
     * function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
     *     return interfaceId == type(MyInterface).interfaceId || super.supportsInterface(interfaceId);
     * }
     * ```
     *
     * Alternatively, {ERC165Storage} provides an easier to use but more expensive implementation.
     */
    abstract contract ERC165Upgradeable is Initializable, IERC165Upgradeable {
        function __ERC165_init() internal onlyInitializing {
        }
    
        function __ERC165_init_unchained() internal onlyInitializing {
        }
        /**
         * @dev See {IERC165-supportsInterface}.
         */
        function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
            return interfaceId == type(IERC165Upgradeable).interfaceId;
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev This empty reserved space is put in place to allow future versions to add new
         * variables without shifting down storage in the inheritance chain.
         * See https://docs.openzeppelin.com/contracts/4.x/upgradeable#storage_gaps
         */
        uint256[50] private __gap;
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
    // OpenZeppelin Contracts v4.4.1 (utils/introspection/IERC165.sol)
    
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /**
     * @dev Interface of the ERC165 standard, as defined in the
     * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165[EIP].
     *
     * Implementers can declare support of contract interfaces, which can then be
     * queried by others ({ERC165Checker}).
     *
     * For an implementation, see {ERC165}.
     */
    interface IERC165Upgradeable {
        /**
         * @dev Returns true if this contract implements the interface defined by
         * `interfaceId`. See the corresponding
         * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165#how-interfaces-are-identified[EIP section]
         * to learn more about how these ids are created.
         *
         * This function call must use less than 30 000 gas.
         */
        function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) external view returns (bool);
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
    // OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.9.0) (utils/math/Math.sol)
    
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /**
     * @dev Standard math utilities missing in the Solidity language.
     */
    library MathUpgradeable {
        enum Rounding {
            Down, // Toward negative infinity
            Up, // Toward infinity
            Zero // Toward zero
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Returns the largest of two numbers.
         */
        function max(uint256 a, uint256 b) internal pure returns (uint256) {
            return a > b ? a : b;
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Returns the smallest of two numbers.
         */
        function min(uint256 a, uint256 b) internal pure returns (uint256) {
            return a < b ? a : b;
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Returns the average of two numbers. The result is rounded towards
         * zero.
         */
        function average(uint256 a, uint256 b) internal pure returns (uint256) {
            // (a + b) / 2 can overflow.
            return (a & b) + (a ^ b) / 2;
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Returns the ceiling of the division of two numbers.
         *
         * This differs from standard division with `/` in that it rounds up instead
         * of rounding down.
         */
        function ceilDiv(uint256 a, uint256 b) internal pure returns (uint256) {
            // (a + b - 1) / b can overflow on addition, so we distribute.
            return a == 0 ? 0 : (a - 1) / b + 1;
        }
    
        /**
         * @notice Calculates floor(x * y / denominator) with full precision. Throws if result overflows a uint256 or denominator == 0
         * @dev Original credit to Remco Bloemen under MIT license (https://xn--2-umb.com/21/muldiv)
         * with further edits by Uniswap Labs also under MIT license.
         */
        function mulDiv(uint256 x, uint256 y, uint256 denominator) internal pure returns (uint256 result) {
            unchecked {
                // 512-bit multiply [prod1 prod0] = x * y. Compute the product mod 2^256 and mod 2^256 - 1, then use
                // use the Chinese Remainder Theorem to reconstruct the 512 bit result. The result is stored in two 256
                // variables such that product = prod1 * 2^256 + prod0.
                uint256 prod0; // Least significant 256 bits of the product
                uint256 prod1; // Most significant 256 bits of the product
                assembly {
                    let mm := mulmod(x, y, not(0))
                    prod0 := mul(x, y)
                    prod1 := sub(sub(mm, prod0), lt(mm, prod0))
                }
    
                // Handle non-overflow cases, 256 by 256 division.
                if (prod1 == 0) {
                    // Solidity will revert if denominator == 0, unlike the div opcode on its own.
                    // The surrounding unchecked block does not change this fact.
                    // See https://docs.soliditylang.org/en/latest/control-structures.html#checked-or-unchecked-arithmetic.
                    return prod0 / denominator;
                }
    
                // Make sure the result is less than 2^256. Also prevents denominator == 0.
                require(denominator > prod1, "Math: mulDiv overflow");
    
                ///////////////////////////////////////////////
                // 512 by 256 division.
                ///////////////////////////////////////////////
    
                // Make division exact by subtracting the remainder from [prod1 prod0].
                uint256 remainder;
                assembly {
                    // Compute remainder using mulmod.
                    remainder := mulmod(x, y, denominator)
    
                    // Subtract 256 bit number from 512 bit number.
                    prod1 := sub(prod1, gt(remainder, prod0))
                    prod0 := sub(prod0, remainder)
                }
    
                // Factor powers of two out of denominator and compute largest power of two divisor of denominator. Always >= 1.
                // See https://cs.stackexchange.com/q/138556/92363.
    
                // Does not overflow because the denominator cannot be zero at this stage in the function.
                uint256 twos = denominator & (~denominator + 1);
                assembly {
                    // Divide denominator by twos.
                    denominator := div(denominator, twos)
    
                    // Divide [prod1 prod0] by twos.
                    prod0 := div(prod0, twos)
    
                    // Flip twos such that it is 2^256 / twos. If twos is zero, then it becomes one.
                    twos := add(div(sub(0, twos), twos), 1)
                }
    
                // Shift in bits from prod1 into prod0.
                prod0 |= prod1 * twos;
    
                // Invert denominator mod 2^256. Now that denominator is an odd number, it has an inverse modulo 2^256 such
                // that denominator * inv = 1 mod 2^256. Compute the inverse by starting with a seed that is correct for
                // four bits. That is, denominator * inv = 1 mod 2^4.
                uint256 inverse = (3 * denominator) ^ 2;
    
                // Use the Newton-Raphson iteration to improve the precision. Thanks to Hensel's lifting lemma, this also works
                // in modular arithmetic, doubling the correct bits in each step.
                inverse *= 2 - denominator * inverse; // inverse mod 2^8
                inverse *= 2 - denominator * inverse; // inverse mod 2^16
                inverse *= 2 - denominator * inverse; // inverse mod 2^32
                inverse *= 2 - denominator * inverse; // inverse mod 2^64
                inverse *= 2 - denominator * inverse; // inverse mod 2^128
                inverse *= 2 - denominator * inverse; // inverse mod 2^256
    
                // Because the division is now exact we can divide by multiplying with the modular inverse of denominator.
                // This will give us the correct result modulo 2^256. Since the preconditions guarantee that the outcome is
                // less than 2^256, this is the final result. We don't need to compute the high bits of the result and prod1
                // is no longer required.
                result = prod0 * inverse;
                return result;
            }
        }
    
        /**
         * @notice Calculates x * y / denominator with full precision, following the selected rounding direction.
         */
        function mulDiv(uint256 x, uint256 y, uint256 denominator, Rounding rounding) internal pure returns (uint256) {
            uint256 result = mulDiv(x, y, denominator);
            if (rounding == Rounding.Up && mulmod(x, y, denominator) > 0) {
                result += 1;
            }
            return result;
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Returns the square root of a number. If the number is not a perfect square, the value is rounded down.
         *
         * Inspired by Henry S. Warren, Jr.'s "Hacker's Delight" (Chapter 11).
         */
        function sqrt(uint256 a) internal pure returns (uint256) {
            if (a == 0) {
                return 0;
            }
    
            // For our first guess, we get the biggest power of 2 which is smaller than the square root of the target.
            //
            // We know that the "msb" (most significant bit) of our target number `a` is a power of 2 such that we have
            // `msb(a) <= a < 2*msb(a)`. This value can be written `msb(a)=2**k` with `k=log2(a)`.
            //
            // This can be rewritten `2**log2(a) <= a < 2**(log2(a) + 1)`
            // → `sqrt(2**k) <= sqrt(a) < sqrt(2**(k+1))`
            // → `2**(k/2) <= sqrt(a) < 2**((k+1)/2) <= 2**(k/2 + 1)`
            //
            // Consequently, `2**(log2(a) / 2)` is a good first approximation of `sqrt(a)` with at least 1 correct bit.
            uint256 result = 1 << (log2(a) >> 1);
    
            // At this point `result` is an estimation with one bit of precision. We know the true value is a uint128,
            // since it is the square root of a uint256. Newton's method converges quadratically (precision doubles at
            // every iteration). We thus need at most 7 iteration to turn our partial result with one bit of precision
            // into the expected uint128 result.
            unchecked {
                result = (result + a / result) >> 1;
                result = (result + a / result) >> 1;
                result = (result + a / result) >> 1;
                result = (result + a / result) >> 1;
                result = (result + a / result) >> 1;
                result = (result + a / result) >> 1;
                result = (result + a / result) >> 1;
                return min(result, a / result);
            }
        }
    
        /**
         * @notice Calculates sqrt(a), following the selected rounding direction.
         */
        function sqrt(uint256 a, Rounding rounding) internal pure returns (uint256) {
            unchecked {
                uint256 result = sqrt(a);
                return result + (rounding == Rounding.Up && result * result < a ? 1 : 0);
            }
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Return the log in base 2, rounded down, of a positive value.
         * Returns 0 if given 0.
         */
        function log2(uint256 value) internal pure returns (uint256) {
            uint256 result = 0;
            unchecked {
                if (value >> 128 > 0) {
                    value >>= 128;
                    result += 128;
                }
                if (value >> 64 > 0) {
                    value >>= 64;
                    result += 64;
                }
                if (value >> 32 > 0) {
                    value >>= 32;
                    result += 32;
                }
                if (value >> 16 > 0) {
                    value >>= 16;
                    result += 16;
                }
                if (value >> 8 > 0) {
                    value >>= 8;
                    result += 8;
                }
                if (value >> 4 > 0) {
                    value >>= 4;
                    result += 4;
                }
                if (value >> 2 > 0) {
                    value >>= 2;
                    result += 2;
                }
                if (value >> 1 > 0) {
                    result += 1;
                }
            }
            return result;
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Return the log in base 2, following the selected rounding direction, of a positive value.
         * Returns 0 if given 0.
         */
        function log2(uint256 value, Rounding rounding) internal pure returns (uint256) {
            unchecked {
                uint256 result = log2(value);
                return result + (rounding == Rounding.Up && 1 << result < value ? 1 : 0);
            }
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Return the log in base 10, rounded down, of a positive value.
         * Returns 0 if given 0.
         */
        function log10(uint256 value) internal pure returns (uint256) {
            uint256 result = 0;
            unchecked {
                if (value >= 10 ** 64) {
                    value /= 10 ** 64;
                    result += 64;
                }
                if (value >= 10 ** 32) {
                    value /= 10 ** 32;
                    result += 32;
                }
                if (value >= 10 ** 16) {
                    value /= 10 ** 16;
                    result += 16;
                }
                if (value >= 10 ** 8) {
                    value /= 10 ** 8;
                    result += 8;
                }
                if (value >= 10 ** 4) {
                    value /= 10 ** 4;
                    result += 4;
                }
                if (value >= 10 ** 2) {
                    value /= 10 ** 2;
                    result += 2;
                }
                if (value >= 10 ** 1) {
                    result += 1;
                }
            }
            return result;
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Return the log in base 10, following the selected rounding direction, of a positive value.
         * Returns 0 if given 0.
         */
        function log10(uint256 value, Rounding rounding) internal pure returns (uint256) {
            unchecked {
                uint256 result = log10(value);
                return result + (rounding == Rounding.Up && 10 ** result < value ? 1 : 0);
            }
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Return the log in base 256, rounded down, of a positive value.
         * Returns 0 if given 0.
         *
         * Adding one to the result gives the number of pairs of hex symbols needed to represent `value` as a hex string.
         */
        function log256(uint256 value) internal pure returns (uint256) {
            uint256 result = 0;
            unchecked {
                if (value >> 128 > 0) {
                    value >>= 128;
                    result += 16;
                }
                if (value >> 64 > 0) {
                    value >>= 64;
                    result += 8;
                }
                if (value >> 32 > 0) {
                    value >>= 32;
                    result += 4;
                }
                if (value >> 16 > 0) {
                    value >>= 16;
                    result += 2;
                }
                if (value >> 8 > 0) {
                    result += 1;
                }
            }
            return result;
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Return the log in base 256, following the selected rounding direction, of a positive value.
         * Returns 0 if given 0.
         */
        function log256(uint256 value, Rounding rounding) internal pure returns (uint256) {
            unchecked {
                uint256 result = log256(value);
                return result + (rounding == Rounding.Up && 1 << (result << 3) < value ? 1 : 0);
            }
        }
    }

    <i class='far fa-question-circle text-muted ms-2' data-bs-trigger='hover' data-bs-toggle='tooltip' data-bs-html='true' data-bs-title='Click on the check box to select individual contract to compare. Only 1 contract can be selected from each side.'></i>

    // SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
    // OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v4.8.0) (utils/math/SignedMath.sol)
    
    pragma solidity ^0.8.0;
    
    /**
     * @dev Standard signed math utilities missing in the Solidity language.
     */
    library SignedMathUpgradeable {
        /**
         * @dev Returns the largest of two signed numbers.
         */
        function max(int256 a, int256 b) internal pure returns (int256) {
            return a > b ? a : b;
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Returns the smallest of two signed numbers.
         */
        function min(int256 a, int256 b) internal pure returns (int256) {
            return a < b ? a : b;
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Returns the average of two signed numbers without overflow.
         * The result is rounded towards zero.
         */
        function average(int256 a, int256 b) internal pure returns (int256) {
            // Formula from the book "Hacker's Delight"
            int256 x = (a & b) + ((a ^ b) >> 1);
            return x + (int256(uint256(x) >> 255) & (a ^ b));
        }
    
        /**
         * @dev Returns the absolute unsigned value of a signed value.
         */
        function abs(int256 n) internal pure returns (uint256) {
            unchecked {
                // must be unchecked in order to support `n = type(int256).min`
                return uint256(n >= 0 ? n : -n);
            }
        }
    }

    Context size (optional):